3900_Series_Multi-Mode_Base_Station_Tech.pdf

3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station V100R004

Technical Description Issue

12

Date

2013-05-27

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Technical Description

About This Document

About This Document

Overview This document describes the 3900 series multi-mode base stations (MBTSs for short) in terms of system architecture, topologies, transmission and clock schemes, and operation and maintenance.

Product Version The following table lists the product version related to this document. Product Name

Product Version

DBS3900

V100R004

BTS3900

V100R004

BTS3900L

V100R004

BTS3900A

V100R004

Intended Audience This document is intended for: l

Network planners

l

Field engineers

l

System engineers

Organization 1 Changes in the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Technical Description This section describes the changes in the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Technical Description of each version. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


ii


About This Document

2 Overview SingleRAN Solution launched by Huawei is a future-oriented solution that meets customers' requirements of network evolution. It adopts the unified design for modules of different modes and unified OM. It also supports the co-existence of devices of different modes at the same site, and the sharing of base station resources. With these features, it meets operators' requirements of multi-mode base stations. 3 MBTS in the Network This section describes the position of the MBTS in the network. 4 MBTS Products MBTSs can be classified into different base stations according to provided services and hardware organizations. 5 Principle of the MBTS System An MBTS mainly consists of BBU3900 (BBU for short), RF modules, and the antenna system. The MBTS can work in dual mode such as GU, GL, or UL or in triple mode such as GU+L or GL+U. 6 MBTS Network Topologies This section describes MBTS transport network topologies and CPRI network topologies. 7 MBTS Hardware Configuration The MBTS includes the BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900A, and DBS3900. Configuration principles for BBUs and RF modules of each base station type are the same. 8 MBTS Transmission Schemes The MBTS supports the independent transmission and co-transmission. 9 MBTS Clock Schemes The MBTS supports multiple external reference clock sources, including the E1/T1 reference clock, BITS reference clock, GPS reference clock, IP reference clock, and synchronous Ethernet clock. Each SiteUnit can use an external reference clock source independently or share the external reference clock source with another SiteUnit. When external reference clock sources are unavailable, the MBTS continues to work for at least 30 days in free-run mode. 10 MBTS Operation and Maintenance Operation and Maintenance (OM) function includes management, monitoring, and maintenance of the software, hardware, and configuration of the MBTSs. In addition, diversified OM modes are provided in various scenarios. 11 MBTS Surge Protection Specifications This section describes surge protection specifications for each base station type and multi-mode RF modules. 12 MBTS Reliability The MBTS adopts a complete redundancy design, which greatly enhances system reliability. 13 Technical Specifications Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


iii


About This Document

This section provides technical specifications for multi-mode RF modules. For technical specifications for single-mode RF modules, see the technical description for the single-mode base station in question.

Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol

Description Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv


About This Document

Convention

Description

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format

Description

Key

Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


v


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

About This Document

Action

Description

Click

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

Double-click

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.


vi


Contents

Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Changes in the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Technical Description..................1 2 Overview.......................................................................................................................................10 3 MBTS in the Network.................................................................................................................12 4 MBTS Products............................................................................................................................14 5 Principle of the MBTS System..................................................................................................16 6 MBTS Network Topologies.......................................................................................................21 7 MBTS Hardware Configuration...............................................................................................27 7.1 BBU Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................28 7.2 RF Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................28

8 MBTS Transmission Schemes..................................................................................................38 8.1 Independent Transmission............................................................................................................................................39 8.2 Co-Transmission...........................................................................................................................................................39 8.2.1 Co-Transmission with TDM......................................................................................................................................39 8.2.2 Co-Transmission with IP...........................................................................................................................................40 8.2.3 Route Backup............................................................................................................................................................43 8.2.4 Hybrid Transport.......................................................................................................................................................45

9 MBTS Clock Schemes.................................................................................................................47 9.1 Independent Reference Clock Mode............................................................................................................................48 9.2 Common Reference Clock Mode.................................................................................................................................51

10 MBTS Operation and Maintenance.......................................................................................55 10.1 OM Modes..................................................................................................................................................................57 10.2 Common Parts............................................................................................................................................................58 10.3 Configuration Management........................................................................................................................................62 10.4 Software Upgrade.......................................................................................................................................................67 10.5 Commissioning Mode.................................................................................................................................................68 10.6 Alarm Management....................................................................................................................................................71 10.7 Mode Evolution..........................................................................................................................................................74 10.8 Inventory and Device Documentation Management..................................................................................................75 Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


vii


Contents

10.9 Maintenance Between Modes.....................................................................................................................................77

11 MBTS Surge Protection Specifications.................................................................................88 12 MBTS Reliability.......................................................................................................................95 13 Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................97 13.1 Technical Specifications for RFUs.............................................................................................................................98 13.1.1 DRFU Technical Specifications..............................................................................................................................98 13.1.2 Technical Specifications for GRFU......................................................................................................................101 13.1.3 Technical Specifications for WRFU......................................................................................................................107 13.1.4 Technical Specifications for WRFUd....................................................................................................................112 13.1.5 Technical Specifications for WRFUe....................................................................................................................117 13.1.6 Technical Specifications for LRFU.......................................................................................................................122 13.1.7 Technical Specifications for LRFUe.....................................................................................................................125 13.1.8 Technical Specifications for MRFU......................................................................................................................127 13.1.9 Technical Specifications for MRFUd....................................................................................................................139 13.1.10 Technical Specifications for MRFUe..................................................................................................................153 13.2 Technical Specifications for RRUs..........................................................................................................................161 13.2.1 RRU3004 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................161 13.2.2 Technical Specifications for RRU3008.................................................................................................................167 13.2.3 Technical Specifications for RRU3801E..............................................................................................................175 13.2.4 Technical Specifications for RRU3804.................................................................................................................183 13.2.5 Technical Specifications for RRU3805.................................................................................................................190 13.2.6 Technical Specifications for RRU3806.................................................................................................................197 13.2.7 Technical Specifications for RRU3808.................................................................................................................204 13.2.8 Technical Specifications for RRU3824.................................................................................................................212 13.2.9 Technical Specifications for RRU3826.................................................................................................................218 13.2.10 Technical Specifications for RRU3828...............................................................................................................224 13.2.11 Technical Specifications for RRU3829...............................................................................................................231 13.2.12 Technical Specifications for RRU3832...............................................................................................................237 13.2.13 Technical Specifications for RRU3201...............................................................................................................245 13.2.14 Technical Specifications for RRU3203...............................................................................................................248 13.2.15 Technical Specifications for RRU3220...............................................................................................................251 13.2.16 Technical Specifications for RRU3221...............................................................................................................254 13.2.17 Technical Specifications for RRU3222...............................................................................................................257 13.2.18 Technical Specifications for RRU3908...............................................................................................................260 13.2.19 Technical Specifications for RRU3926...............................................................................................................276 13.2.20 RRU3936 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................285 13.2.21 Technical Specifications for RRU3928...............................................................................................................292 13.2.22 Technical Specifications for RRU3929...............................................................................................................303 13.2.23 Technical Specifications for RRU3942...............................................................................................................315

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


viii


1

1 Changes in the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Technical Description

Changes in the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Technical Description This section describes the changes in the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Technical Description of each version.

12 (2013-05-27) This is issue 12. Compared with issue 11 (2013-01-14), this issue includes the following new topics: l

13.2.12 Technical Specifications for RRU3832

l

13.2.20 RRU3936 Technical Specifications

Compared with issue 11 (2013-01-14), this issue incorporates the following changes: Topic

Change Description

6 MBTS Network Topologies

Added specifications for CPRI ports on the RRU3936.

Compared with issue 11 (2013-01-14), this issue does not exclude any topics.

11 (2013-01-14) This is issue 11. Compared with issue 10 (2012-10-31), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue 10 (2012-10-31), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Topic

Change Description

11 MBTS Surge Protection Specifications

Removed description about the BTS3900A (Ver.D1) cabinets, and renamed the BTS3900A (Ver.D2) cabinets BTS3900A (Ver.D).


1



Topic

Change Description


Added specifications when it operates in the 850 MHz frequency band.


10 (2012-10-31) This is issue 10. Compared with issue 09 (2012-09-27), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue 09 (2012-09-27), this issue incorporates the following changes: Topic

Change Description

7.2 RF Configuration

Modified the hybrid configuration rule for radio frequency (RF) modules.



13.1.1 DRFU Technical Specifications

l

13.1.2 Technical Specifications for GRFU

l

13.1.3 Technical Specifications for WRFU

l

13.1.4 Technical Specifications for WRFUd

l

13.1.5 Technical Specifications for WRFUe

l

13.1.6 Technical Specifications for LRFU

l

13.1.7 Technical Specifications for LRFUe

l

13.2.1 RRU3004 Technical Specifications

l


l

13.2.3 Technical Specifications for RRU3801E

l


l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


2



l


l


l


l


l


l



Change Description

4 MBTS Products

Added description about the BTS3900C.


l Removed MRFU V3 modules. l Modified CPRI data rate for CPRI ports on the RRU3908 V1.


Added the hybrid configuration rule to radio frequency (RF) modules.

10.9 Maintenance Between Modes

Updated the table Maintenance operations that may affect services of other SiteUnits.


l Modified the surge protection specifications of ports on the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), BTS3900L (Ver.B), and BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets. l Added the surge protection specifications of ports on the BTS3900 (Ver.D), BTS3900L (Ver.D), BTS3900A (Ver.D1), BTS3900A (Ver.D2), and BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets.

13.1.8 Technical Specifications for MRFU

Modified the frequency band supported by an MRFU V2.


08 (2012-06-20) This is issue 08. Compared with issue 07 (2012-04-16), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue 07 (2012-04-16), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Topic

Change Description

13.1.10 Technical Specifications for MRFUe

Added specifications when it operates in the 900 MHz frequency band.


3



Topic

Change Description

13.2 Technical Specifications for RRUs

Modified the operating environment standards for RRUs.





Change Description



8.2.1 Co-Transmission with TDM

Changed the title to Co-Transmission with TDM.

10.2 Common Parts

Added items to common parts. These items are the BBU3900 subrack, UPEU, UEIU, and FAN.

10.4 Software Upgrade

Added the note: During a one-sided upgrade, start event of common parts can be reported only by the SiteUnit that is being upgraded.

10.5 Commissioning Mode

Added the description: The security of the USB loading port is ensured by encryption.

10.6 Alarm Management

l Added the description: Alarms reported by unilaterally managed common parts may affect the operation of other SiteUnits. On the Browse Current Alarm tab page, the Additional Information column lists the RAT_INFO and AFFECTED_INFO information. With the information, maintenance personnel can know the mode information about the base station where the alarm is generated and the modes that are affected by the alarm. l Added the Browse Current Alarm tab page of the M2000.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


4



Topic

Change Description


Added impact of resetting a base station: During an MBTS reset, start event of common parts can be observed by the related managing SiteUnits.


Updated surge protection specifications.

13 Technical Specifications

Added receiver sensitivity and power consumption specifications for LTE.

13.1 Technical Specifications for RFUs

Added the size and weight of the RFU.





Change Description



10.2 Common Parts

Optimized the description.

10.3 Configuration Management


10.6 Alarm Management



Updated RF specifications.

13.1.9 Technical Specifications for MRFUd








Compared with issue 05 (2011-11-30), this issue does not exclude any topics. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


5




Change Description






l

13.1 Technical Specifications for RFUs

l


l

13.1.9 Technical Specifications for MRFUd

l

13.1.10 Technical Specifications for MRFUe

l

13.2 Technical Specifications for RRUs

l


l


l



Change Description


Removed Working Standard and Number of Carriers Supported from CPRI Interface Specifications.


Removed surge protection specifications of the ports on multi-mode RF modules.


03 (2011-08-30) This is issue 03. Compared with issue 02 (2011-07-30), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue 02 (2011-07-30), this issue incorporates the following changes: Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


6



Topic

Change Description


Added specifications for CPRI ports on the MRFU V3 module.

8.2.2 Co-Transmission with IP

l Removed QoS schemes. l Modified IPSec descriptions.

9.2 Common Reference Clock Mode

Added the note: Currently, only the frequency synchronization method is supported for two SiteUnits to share an external reference clock source.


Added the cabinet version Ver.B to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L.



Change Description

5 Principle of the MBTS System

Modified antenna descriptions.


Added specifications for the CPRI ports on the MRFU V1, MRFUe, RRU3908 V1, and RRU3929 modules.

7.1 BBU Configuration

Modified UBRI board descriptions.


Added RF configurations for the MRFUe and RRU3929.

10.2 Common Parts

Modified usage scenarios of loading control rights.

10.3 Configuration Management

Added restrictions which apply when monitoring boards are managed by only one SiteUnit.

10.7 Mode Evolution

Modified typical evolution scenarios.


Added impact of resetting or powering off a board at the local end on services at the peer end.

Compared with issue 01 (2011-04-30), this issue does not exclude any topics. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


7



01 (2011-04-30) This is issue 01. Compared with Draft A (2011-03-30), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with Draft A (2011-03-30), this issue incorporates the following changes: Topic

Change Description


Added specifications for the CPRI ports on the MRFUd.


Added RF configurations for the MRFUd.


Added surge protection specifications for the ports on the BTS3900 (Ver.C), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900A (Ver.C).

Compared with Draft A (2011-03-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft A (2011-03-30) This is the release of Draft A. Compared with issue V100R003 04 (2010-12-30), this issue includes the following new topics: l

3 MBTS in the Network

l

4 MBTS Products

l

7 MBTS Hardware Configuration

l

10.7 Mode Evolution

Compared with issue V100R003 04 (2010-12-30), this issue incorporates the following changes: Topic

Change Description

2 Overview

Modified product descriptions.


Added descriptions about the triple-mode application.


Modified information about CPRI-based topologies and added specifications for CPRI ports on boards and modules.

10 MBTS Operation and Maintenance

Added descriptions about the triple-mode application.


l Added impact of activating or deactivating a base station performed at the GBTS on services at the peer end. l Modified operation impacts provided in Setting loading control rights.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


8



Compared with issue V100R003 04 (2010-12-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


9


2 Overview

2

Overview

SingleRAN Solution launched by Huawei is a future-oriented solution that meets customers' requirements of network evolution. It adopts the unified design for modules of different modes and unified OM. It also supports the co-existence of devices of different modes at the same site, and the sharing of base station resources. With these features, it meets operators' requirements of multi-mode base stations. Figure 2-1 shows products of SingleRAN Solution. Figure 2-1 Products of SingleRAN Solution

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


10


l

2 Overview

Single-mode products are GSM Only (GO) products, UMTS Only (UO) products, and LTE Only (LO) products. Single-mode products support services of a single mode. For details, see Table 2-1. Table 2-1 Single-mode products Product

Component

GO

BSC: BSC6900 GO, BSC6000 GBTS: 3900 series base stations in GO mode, 3012 series base stations

UO

RNC: BSC6900 UO, BSC6810 NodeB: 3900 series base stations in UO mode, 3812 series base stations

LO l

eNodeB: 3900 series base stations in LO mode

Multi-mode products are MBSCs, MBTSs, multi-mode co-site products, and products used in cabinet reuse scenario. Multi-mode products support services of multiple modes simultaneously. For details, see Table 2-2. Table 2-2 Multi-mode products Product

Description

MBSC

The MBSC incorporates functions of the RNC and BSC and follows the trend towards multi-mode convergence in the mobile network.

MBTS

The MBTS, implemented by 3900 series base stations, incorporates functions of the GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB and follows the trend towards multi-mode convergence in the mobile network.

Cabinet Reuse

Components of 3900 series base stations are placed in reused cabinets.

Multi-Mode Co-Site

3900 series base stations share sites with existing base stations. For example, multi-mode co-site is implemented by BTS3012 (GO) and BTS3900 with main control boards being cascaded.

This document provides information about the MBTS only.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


11



3

MBTS in the Network

This section describes the position of the MBTS in the network. Figure 3-1 shows the position of the MBTS in the network. Figure 3-1 MBTS in the network

Functions of each network element (NE) are as follows:

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


12



MBTS An MBTS consisting of multiple SiteUnits has its own attributes such as name and mode. The attribute information can be queried on the M2000. The attribute mode indicates that services of a certain mode can be provided by an MBTS. This mode can be GO, UO, LO, GU, GL, UL, or GUL. In Figure 3-1, the mode is GUL, indicating that GSM, UMTS, and LTE services are provided. In this case, there are three SiteUnits: GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB. Physically, each SiteUnit has its own main control board. Logically, each SiteUnit has its own main control unit that controls and manages components of this SiteUnit. In addition, each SiteUnit has its own attributes such as name, mode, type, and version. The attribute mode indicates that services of a certain mode can be provided by a SiteUnit. The mode can be GSM, UMTS, or LTE. The attribute type indicates a base station type such as BTS3900 or DBS3900. The attribute version indicates the software version of a SiteUnit. In Figure 3-1, one SiteUnit is GBTS. The mode of the GBTS is GSM, indicating that GSM services are provided. The type of the GBTS can be BTS3900 or DBS3900.

MBSC The MBSC incorporates functions of the RNC and BSC. It is connected to a network where GSM and UMTS services co-exist as an independent network element (NE). For details, see the BSC6900 GU Product Documentation. Each SiteUnit of an MBTS is connected to an MBSC or Mobility Management Entity/Serving Gateway (MME/S-GW) by using an interface. A GBTS is connected to an MBSC by using the Abis interface. A NodeB is connected to an MBSC by using the Iub interface. An eNodeB is connected to an MME/S-GE by using the S1 interface.

OMC The Operation and Maintenance Center (OMC), includes the M2000, CME, LMT, SMT, and so on. Users can use the OMC to manage and maintain MBTSs and MBSCs.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


13


4 MBTS Products

4

MBTS Products

MBTSs can be classified into different base stations according to provided services and hardware organizations. MBTSs are currently classified into BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, and DBS3900 according to hardware organizations, as shown in Table 4-1. Table 4-1 Base station type Type

Remarks

BTS3900

BTS3900 is applicable to indoor installation scenarios where traffic intensity is high, lease cost of the equipment room is high, or space in the equipment room is limited.

BTS3900 A

BTS3900A is applicable to outdoor installation scenarios such as cities, suburbs, or rural areas where wide coverage is required.

BTS3900 L

BTS3900L is applicable to indoor installation scenarios with high capacity requirements where traffic intensity is high, lease cost of the equipment room is high, or space in the equipment room is limited.

DBS3900

DBS3900 is applicable to outdoor installation scenarios where wide coverage is required or base station deployment is difficult.

BTS3900 C

BTS3900C is a mini outdoor base station and applies to hot spots, tunnels, and borders.

MBTSs are currently classified into dual-mode and triple-mode base stations according to provided services, as shown in Table 4-2. Table 4-2 Base station type

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Type

Remarks

Dualmode base station

A dual-mode base station, providing services of two modes, can work in GSM and UMTS (GU), GSM and LTE (GL), or UMTS and LTE (UL) mode. For example, a GU dual-mode base station provides GSM and UMTS services. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14


4 MBTS Products

Type

Remarks

Triplemode base station

A triple-mode base station currently provides GSM, UMTS, and LTE services simultaneously.

MBTSs can be also classified into co-cabinet base stations and co-module base stations according to RF modules that are used. l

In co-module scenario, one RF module works for multiple modes. This is achieved by using the Software-Defined Radio (SDR) technique in the manner of software configuration.

l

In co-cabinet scenario, RF modules and boards of different modes are installed in one cabinet. In this manner, the cabinet supports multiple modes. Note that co-cabinet is a solution only that indicates combination of multiple logically independent products. These products still connect to each other on service consideration. Base stations where this solution is adopted can be further categorized into the following two types: – Single-mode co-cabinet: Two or more single-mode components are placed in one cabinet. – Hybrid co-cabinet: Single-mode and multi-mode components are placed in one cabinet. Multi-mode components can support new modes by upgrading their software.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


15



5

Principle of the MBTS System

An MBTS mainly consists of BBU3900 (BBU for short), RF modules, and the antenna system. The MBTS can work in dual mode such as GU, GL, or UL or in triple mode such as GU+L or GL+U.

System Architecture Figure 5-1, Figure 5-2, and Figure 5-3 show system architectures for a dual-mode base station. l

GU: GSM and UMTS boards are configured in the BBU. Some of the RF modules connected to the BBU work in GO mode, some work in UO mode, and the remaining work in GU mode.

Figure 5-1 GU system architecture

l

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

GL: GSM and LTE boards are configured in the BBU. Some of the RF modules connected to the BBU work in GO mode, some work in LO mode, and the remaining work in GL mode.


16



Figure 5-2 GL system architecture

l

UL: UMTS and LTE boards are configured in the BBU. Some of the RF modules connected to the BBU work in UO mode and the remaining work in LO mode.

Figure 5-3 UL system architecture

Two BBUs are required when an MBTS works in triple mode. Figure 5-4 and Figure 5-5 show system architectures for a triple-mode base station. l

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

GU+L: GSM and UMTS boards are configured in BBU 0. Some of the RF modules connected to BBU 0 work in GO mode, some work in UO mode, and the remaining work in GU mode. Only LTE boards are configured in BBU 1 and RF modules connected to BBU 1 work in LO mode.


17



Figure 5-4 GU+L system architecture

l

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

GL+U: GSM and LTE boards are configured in BBU 0. Some of the RF modules connected to BBU 0 work in GO mode, some work in LO mode, and the remaining work in GL mode. Only UMTS boards are configured in BBU 1 and RF modules connected to BBU 1 work in UO mode.


18



Figure 5-5 GU+UO system architecture

The MBTS consists of the following parts:

BBU The BBU has a modular structure and consists of the control subsystem, transport subsystem, baseband subsystem, and power and environment monitoring subsystem. When equipped with boards of different modes, the BBU can serve any two modes at the same time, therefore enabling dual-mode application. In this manner, information of the two modes is exchanged within the BBU, therefore achieving clock signal transferring and data forwarding. BBU subsystems are as follows: l

The control subsystem includes the GTMU, WMPT, and LMPT boards. The control subsystem manages the entire base station in a centralized manner including OM, signaling processing and system clock.

l

The transport subsystem includes the GTMU, WMPT, LMPT, and UTRP boards. It provides physical interfaces connecting the MBTS to the transport network to achieve information exchange. It also provides the OM channel connecting the MBTS to the OMC.

l

The baseband subsystem includes RF modules (for GSM), the WBBP board (for UMTS), and the LBBP board (for LTE). The baseband subsystem processes UL and DL baseband signals and provides CPRI ports through which the BBU can exchange information with RF modules. For GSM, the GTMU or UBRI board provides CPRI ports through which the BBU can exchange information with RF modules.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


19


l


The power and environment monitoring subsystem includes the UPEU and UEIU boards. It provides power supply to the BBU and monitors the power status. It also provides ports that are connected to environment monitoring devices and therefore it receives and transfers signals transmitted from the environment monitoring devices.

RF Modules RF modules (RXUs for short) include RFUs used in macro base stations and RRUs used in distributed base stations. An RXU (**) refers to an RF module of a certain mode that can process RF signals of the mode. Where, "**" indicates the working mode of the RXU. For example, RXU (GU) is an RF module that works in GU mode and processes GSM and UMTS RF signals. Based on processing capability, RF modules are classified into single-mode RF modules and multi-mode RF modules. l

Single-mode RF modules process RF signals of only one mode. For GSM RF modules, they process not only RF signals but also baseband signals. For information about singlemode RF modules, see the technical description of the corresponding single-mode base station.

l

Adopting the Software Defined Radio (SDR) technique, each multi-mode RF module can process RF signals of any two modes by using different software configurations. GU or GL RF modules can also process GSM baseband signals.

Single-mode and multi-mode RF modules can be installed in the same cabinet of an MBTS to achieve applications of multiple frequency bands and multiple modes.

Antenna System The antenna system consists of antennas, feeders, jumpers, the Tower Mounted Amplifier (TMA), and the Same band Antenna Sharing Unit (SASU). It transmits and receives RF signals. When two radio communication systems operate in the same frequency band and cover the same area, it is recommended that the two systems share the antenna system to reduce the CAPEX on network deployment. If multi-mode RF modules are used at an MBTS, signals of two radio communication systems operating in the same frequency band are transmitted from the same port to achieve antenna system sharing. If single-mode RF modules are used, the Same band Antenna Sharing Unit (SASU) is recommended.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


20



6

MBTS Network Topologies

This section describes MBTS transport network topologies and CPRI network topologies.

MBTS Transport Network Topologies The MBTS supports multiple network topologies such as the chain, star, and tree topology, as shown in Figure 6-1.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


21



Figure 6-1 MBTS transport network topologies

Table 6-1 lists features of each network topology.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


22



Table 6-1 MBTS transport network topologies Topology

Advantage

Disadvantage

Chain

This topology helps reduce costs of transmission equipment, engineering construction, and leased transmission lines.

l Signals travel through many nodes, which lowers line reliability. l Faults in an upper-level base station may affect lower-level base stations. NOTE In a chain topology, if Abis bypass is enabled, lower-level base stations can work properly even if there is a power failure in an upper-level base station.

Star

l Each MBTS is directly connected to an MBSC/MME/S-GW. Therefore, this topology is characterized by easy engineering, maintenance, and capacity expansion.

Compared with other topologies, the star topology requires more transmission resources.

l Each MBTS directly transmits data to and receives data from an MBSC. Signals travel through few nodes, and therefore line reliability is high. Tree

The tree topology requires fewer transmission cables than the star topology.

l Signals travel through many nodes, and therefore line reliability is low and engineering and maintenance are difficult. l Faults in an upper-level base station may affect lower-level base stations. l Capacity expansion is difficult because it may require changes in the current network architecture.

CPRI Network Topologies The MBTS supports multiple CPRI network topologies such as the chain, star, ring, and dualstar topology, as shown in Figure 6-2. Single-mode RF modules support the chain, ring, and star topology while multi-mode RF modules support the star and dual-star topology.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


23



Figure 6-2 CPRI network topologies

NOTE

In Figure 6-2, the dual-star topology is used at a GU BTS.

Table 6-2 lists features of each network topology.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


24



Table 6-2 CPRI network topologies Topo logy

Advantage

Disadvantage

Remarks

Chain

The cost of transmission equipment is low.

l The number of levels in l RFUs and RRUs a chain and the cannot be cascaded. cascading distance are l Only single-mode RF restricted. modules can be used l RXUs working in in the chain topology. different modes cannot l Data rates of two be cascaded. CPRI ports on an l Faults in an upper-level RXU may affect lowerlevel RXUs.

Ring

Transmission reliability is guaranteed.

RXU must be the same. That is, the data rate on a CPRI chain must be identical.

l The number of levels in l RFUs cannot be used a chain and the in the ring topology. cascading distance are l Only single-mode RF restricted. modules can be used l RRUs working in in the ring topology. different modes cannot l The ring topology is be cascaded. implemented on the l Faults in an upper-level RRU may affect lowerlevel RRUs.

Star

l Transmission reliability is high. When an RXU or an optical cable is faulty, only one sector is affected.

basis of the chain topology by adding a redundant link.

Compared with other topologies, the star topology requires large number of optical cables.

-

Two CPRI ports on an RXU are used by two modes respectively. Therefore, RXUs cannot be cascaded.

l Only multi-mode RF modules can be used in the dual-star topology.

l The installation and maintenance are easy. Dualstar

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Data of each mode is transmitted over its own CPRI cables. In this manner, decoupling is achieved and the impact on each mode is reduced.


l Data rates of two CPRI ports on an RXU must be the same. Therefore, a lower data rate is supported on two CPRI ports.

25



Based on the longest distance between a BBU and an RRU on a chain, CPRI networks can be deployed in two scenarios, that is, short-distance remote and long-distance remote scenarios. l

In the short-distance remote scenario, the longest distance between an RRU and a BBU on a CPRI chain should be no more than 100 m.

l

In the long-distance remote scenario, the longest distance between an RRU and a BBU on a CPRI chain ranges from 100 m to 40 km.

Different CPRI optical cables are used in two scenarios. For details, see chapter CPRI Optical Cable in the BBU3900 Hardware Description.

CPRI Specifications For specifications for Common Protocol Radio Interface (CPRI) ports on boards and singlemode radio frequency (RF) modules, refer to the technical description of the corresponding single-mode base station. Table 6-3 lists the specifications for CPRI ports on multi-mode RF modules. Table 6-3 Specifications for CPRI ports on multi-mode RF modules Module

Number of CPRI Ports

Data Rate

Topology

Maximum Distance from the BBU

MRFU V1

2

1.25 Gbit/s

Star or dual-star

N/A

MRFU V2

2

1.25/2.5 Gbit/s

Star or dual-star

N/A

MRFUd

2

1.25/2.5 Gbit/s

Star or dual-star

N/A

MRFUe

2

1.25/2.5 Gbit/s

Star or dual-star

N/A

RRU3908 V1

2

l 850, 900, or 1900 MHz: 1.25 Gbit/s

Star or dual-star

40 km

l 1800 MHz: 1.25/2.5 Gbit/s

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

RRU3908 V2

2

1.25/2.5 Gbit/s

Star or dual-star

40 km

RRU3926

2

1.25/2.5 Gbit/s

Star or dual-star

40 km

RRU3936

2

1.25/2.5 Gbit/s

Star or dual-star

40 km

RRU3928

2

1.25/2.5 Gbit/s

Star or dual-star

40 km

RRU3929

2

1.25/2.5 Gbit/s

Star or dual-star

40 km

RRU3942

2

1.25/2.5 Gbit/s

Star or dual-star

40 km


26



7

MBTS Hardware Configuration

About This Chapter The MBTS includes the BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900A, and DBS3900. Configuration principles for BBUs and RF modules of each base station type are the same. 7.1 BBU Configuration Boards and modules of different types can be installed in a BBU according to the actual situation. 7.2 RF Configuration RF configuration includes the configuration of the antenna system and that of RF modules.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


27



7.1 BBU Configuration Boards and modules of different types can be installed in a BBU according to the actual situation. Boards and modules that can be installed in a BBU are main control boards (including the GTMU, WMPT, and LMPT), baseband boards (including the WBBP and LBBP), the universal baseband radio interface board (UBRI), the transmission extension board (the UTRP), the satellite card and clock unit (the USCU), the fan module (FAN), the power module (UPEU), the environment interface board (UEIU), and so on. For details, see the BBU3900 Hardware Description. For a dual-mode base station, one BBU is required. The following figures show the typical configurations for different dual-mode base stations: l

GU:

l

GL:

l

UL:

For a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are required. The following figures show the typical configurations for different triple-mode base stations: l

GU+L:

l

GL+U:

7.2 RF Configuration RF configuration includes the configuration of the antenna system and that of RF modules. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


28



Typical Configuration For configuration principles of single-mode RF modules, see the technical description of the corresponding single-mode base station. This section mainly describes the typical configuration principles of multi-mode RF modules. The following figures take MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, RRU3908 V2, RRU3928, and RRU3929 as examples. Figure 7-1 shows the typical configuration when only one module is used in a single sector. In this case, the antenna system is connected to ANT ports on the module by using a pair of dualpolarized antennas. l

ANT ports on the MRFU and MRFUe are ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_RXB. The ANT_TX/ RXA port is a receiving and transmitting port while the ANT_RXB port is used to receive signals.

l

ANT ports on the MRFUd, RRU3908 V2, RRU3928, and RRU3929 are ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/RXB. The two ports are used to receive and transmit signals.

Figure 7-1 Typical configuration of single-sector and single-module

Figure 7-2 shows the typical configuration when two modules are used in a single sector. l

When two MRFUs or MRFUes are used, the antenna system is connected to the ANT_TX/ RXA ports on the two MRFUs by using a pair of dual-polarized antennas. The RX_OUTA and RX_INB ports on the two MRFUs are connected through an inter-RFU RF signal cable to achieve the application of receive diversity.

l

When the MRFUds, RRU3908s V2, RRU3928s, or RRU3929s are used, the antenna system is connected to the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/RXB ports on each RF module by using a pair of dual-polarized antennas.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


29



Figure 7-2 Typical configuration of single-sector and dual-module

A multi-sector consists of multiple single-sectors and it is configured according to the configuration principle for a single-sector.

Hybrid Configuration Rule for RFUs You can use two RFUs to expand system capacity or to achieve mode evolution. Table 7-1 provides the hybrid configuration rule for RFUs. NOTE

In the following table, nTmR indicates that the related RF module has n transmit channels and m receive channels.

Table 7-1 Hybrid configuration rule for RFUs

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Different frequency bands

All types of RFUs support hybrid configuration.

Same freque ncy band

All types of RFUs support hybrid configuration.

Differen t sectors


30



Same sector

For RFUs supporting the GSM mode: l All types of RFUs except DRFUs support hybrid configuration. l When different types of RFUs are used together, you must upgrade the software of the base station, base station controller, and CME to the required version. l When an MRFUd is used together with a 1T2R RFU of another type: – The MRFUd does not work with the RFU to achieve the intermodule radio frequency (RF) frequency hopping function. – The MRFUd does not work with the RFU to achieve the dual-PA power sharing function. PA stands for power amplifier. l When a GRFU is used together with an MRFU or MRFUe: – If the MRFU or MRFUe is working in GSM mode, it can work with the GRFU to achieve the inter-module RF frequency hopping and dual-PA power sharing functions. In this case, the MRFUe supports a maximum of 6 carriers, and the difference between the number of carriers on the GRFU and the number of carriers on the MRFUe must not exceed 1. – If the MRFU or MRFUe is working in GU or GL mode, it cannot work with the GRFU to achieve the inter-module RF frequency hopping or dual-PA power sharing function. Figure 7-3 shows RFU hybrid configuration for a GL dual-mode base station that is upgraded from a GSM only (GO) single-mode base station. For RFUs supporting the UMTS mode: l Two 1T2R RFUs can be used together. l Single-mode RF modules cannot be used together with multi-mode RF modules. l When multiple multi-mode RF modules are used together, UMTS carriers must be configured on one module. l When MRFU V1 or MRFU V2 modules are used together with other types of RFUs, the software of the base station must be upgraded to the required version if the DC and MIMO functions are to be supported across these modules. Figure 7-4 shows RFU hybrid configuration for a base station whose capacity is to be expanded. For RFUs supporting the LTE mode: l For RFUs working in LTE mode: Two 1T2R RFUs of the same type and can work together to support the 2T configuration. Two 2T2R RFUs of the same type can work together to support the 4T configuration. l For RFUs working in multi-mode: Two 1T2R RFUs can work together to support the 2T configuration. l When different types of RFUs are used together, you must upgrade the software of the base station to the required version. Figure 7-5 shows RFU hybrid configuration for a GL dual-mode base station that is upgraded from a GO single-mode base station.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


31



Figure 7-3 RFU hybrid configuration (scenario 1)

l

Before mode evolution, the configuration is GSM S8/8/8. Each sector has two GRFU V2 modules that operate in the 1800 MHz frequency band, and each module supports four carriers.

l

After mode evolution, the configuration changes to GSM S8/8/8 + LTE 3 x 15 MHz, and one GRFU V2 module in each sector is replaced by one MRFUd that operates in the 1800 MHz frequency band. In addition, this MRFUd works in GL mode and supports 4 GSM carriers and 1 LTE carrier.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


32




l

Before capacity expansion, the configuration is UMTS 3 x 2. Each sector has one WRFU whose maximum transmit power is 40 W and this WRFU supports 2 UMTS carriers.

l

After capacity expansion, the configuration changes to UMTS 3 x 6. In each sector, one WRFU whose maximum transmit power is 80 W is added. Each WRFU supports four UMTS carriers.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


33




l

Before mode evolution, the configuration is GSM S4/4/4. Each sector has one MRFU V1 module that supports four GSM carriers.

l

After mode evolution, the configuration changes to LTE 3 x 5 MHz. In each sector, one MRFU V2 module is added. This MRFU V2 module works together with the MRFU V1 module in the same cell to support one LTE carrier.

Hybrid Configuration Rule for RRUs You can use two RRUs to expand system capacity or to achieve mode evolution. Table 7-2 provides the hybrid configuration rule for RRUs. NOTE

In the following table, nTmR indicates that the related RF module has n transmit channels and m receive channels.

Table 7-2 Hybrid configuration rule for RRUs

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Different frequency bands

All types of RRUs support hybrid configuration.

Same freque

All types of RRUs support hybrid configuration.

Differen t sectors


34


ncy band


Same sector

For RRUs supporting the GSM mode: l All types of RRUs except the RRU3004 support hybrid configuration. l In the same subsite, only RRU3008 V1 and RRU3008 V2 modules can be used together, and only RRU3908 V1 and RRU3908 V2 modules can be used together. Figure 7-6 shows RRU hybrid configuration for a GL dual-mode base station that is upgraded from a GSM only (GO) single-mode base station. For RRUs supporting the UMTS mode: l Two 1T2R RRUs can be used together. l Single-mode RF modules cannot be used together with multi-mode RF modules. l When multiple multi-mode RF modules are used together, UMTS carriers must be configured on one module. Figure 7-7 shows RRU hybrid configuration for a base station whose capacity is to be expanded. For RRUs supporting the LTE mode: l For RRUs working in LTE mode: Two 1T2R RRUs of the same type and can work together to support the 2T configuration. Two 2T2R RRUs of the same type can work together to support the 4T configuration. l For RRUs working in multi-mode: Two 1T2R RRUs can work together to support the 2T configuration. l When different types of RRUs are used together, you must upgrade the software of the base station to the required version.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


35



Figure 7-6 RRU hybrid configuration (scenario 1)

l

Before mode evolution, the configuration is GSM S6/6/6. Each sector has one RRU3908 V1 module that operates in the 1800 MHz frequency band, and each module supports six GSM carriers.

l

After mode evolution, the configuration changes to GSM S8/8/8 + LTE 3 x 20 MHz. In each sector, one RRU3929 that operates in the 1800 MHz frequency band is added. In addition, this RRU3929 works in GL mode and supports 4 GSM carriers and 1 LTE carrier.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


36



Figure 7-7 RRU hybrid configuration (scenario 2)

l

Before capacity expansion, the configuration is UMTS 3 x 4. Each sector has one RRU3804 that supports four UMTS carriers.

l

After capacity expansion, the configuration changes to UMTS 3 x 8. In each sector, one RRU3806 that supports four UMTS carriers is added.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


37


8 MBTS Transmission Schemes

8

MBTS Transmission Schemes

About This Chapter The MBTS supports the independent transmission and co-transmission. 8.1 Independent Transmission When the independent transmission is applied to an MBTS, each SiteUnit is connected to the transport network through independent physical transmission ports. In this case, transmission resources are not shared and therefore no impact exists between SiteUnits in terms of transmission. 8.2 Co-Transmission When co-transmission is applied to an MBTS, each SiteUnit is connected to the transport network through common physical transmission ports. In this case, transmission resources are shared but impacts exist between SiteUnits in terms of transmission. Co-transmission is classified into co-transmission with TDM timeslot cross and co-transmission with IP. When cotransmission with IP is applied, route backup and hybrid transport are supported.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


38



8.1 Independent Transmission When the independent transmission is applied to an MBTS, each SiteUnit is connected to the transport network through independent physical transmission ports. In this case, transmission resources are not shared and therefore no impact exists between SiteUnits in terms of transmission. Figure 8-1 shows the principle of the independent transmission. The transmission scheme and transmission feature of each SiteUnit are the same as those of a single-mode base station. For details, see the technical description of a single-mode base station. Figure 8-1 Independent transmission

8.2 Co-Transmission When co-transmission is applied to an MBTS, each SiteUnit is connected to the transport network through common physical transmission ports. In this case, transmission resources are shared but impacts exist between SiteUnits in terms of transmission. Co-transmission is classified into co-transmission with TDM timeslot cross and co-transmission with IP. When cotransmission with IP is applied, route backup and hybrid transport are supported.

8.2.1 Co-Transmission with TDM The TDM timeslot cross function can be used to multiplex data of two modes onto the transport network only when an MBTS works in GU mode. In this manner, E1/T1 transmission resources are shared on a timeslot basis and TDM transmission bandwidth can be shared in a semi-static way. The co-transmission with TDM timeslot cross function is implemented by the GSM Transmission, Timing, and Management Unit for BBU (GTMU) board or the GSM Universal Transmission Processing unit (UTRP) board, as shown in Figure 8-2. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


39



Figure 8-2 Co-transmission with TDM timeslot cross

The WCDMA Main Processing and Transmission Unit (WMPT) board transmits UMTS E1/T1 timeslots to the GTMU or UTRP board through the TOP channel on the backplane. The GTMU or UTRP board provides E1/T1 ports that connect a base station to the transport network. The GSM data and UMTS data are multiplexed onto the transport network by using the TDM timeslot cross function, therefore achieving E1/T1 transmission resource sharing on the timeslot basis. In the preceding scenario, only the following two clock schemes can be used: l

The GBTS is configured with an E1/T1 clock source while the NodeB shares the GBTS' clock signals. (Recommended)

l

When the BSC and RNC use the same E1/T1 clock source, the NodeB can be configured with the E1/T1 clock source and the GBTS can share the NodeB's clock or can be configured with another clock source.

8.2.2 Co-Transmission with IP The MBTS can use techniques such as IP over Ethernet and IP over E1/T1 to enable different SiteUnits to share physical transmission resources and dynamically share the transmission bandwidth. Co-transmission with IP can be implemented at an MBTS where only two SiteUnits share transmission resources by connecting FE/GE ports on the main control boards of two SiteUnits. In this scenario, the main control boards must be installed in the same BBU and FE/GE ports on the main control boards must be interconnected to transfer data. In addition, a transmission port on one SiteUnit is connected to the transport network and data of two SiteUnits is carried on this transmission link. FE/GE ports can be interconnected in two ways, that is, interconnecting FE/GE electrical ports and interconnecting FE/GE optical ports.

Co-Transmission Between GBTS and NodeB If co-transmission between the GBTS and the NodeB is required, as shown in Figure 8-3, an FE port on the GSM Transmission, Timing, and Management Unit for BBU (GTMU) board must be interconnected with an FE port on the WCDMA Main Processing and Transmission Unit (WMPT) board using an FE interconnection cable. In this case, GSM data is transferred over this FE interconnection cable. Moreover, another transmission port on the WMPT board is connected to the transport network and GSM and UMTS data is carried on this transmission link. If the MBTS needs to connect to the transport network by using GE ports, the Universal Transmission Processing unit REV:2 (UTRP2) board can be configured for the NodeB. Then, Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


40



an FE port on the GTMU board is interconnected with an FE/GE port on the UTRP2 board and the other FE/GE port on the UTRP2 board is connected to the transport network. Figure 8-3 Co-transmission with IP (GU mode)

Co-Transmission Between GBTS and eNodeB If co-transmission between the GBTS and the eNodeB is required, as shown in Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5, an FE port on the GTMU board must be interconnected with an FE/GE port on the LTE Main Processing & Transmission Unit (LMPT) board using an FE interconnection cable. In this case, GSM data is transferred over this FE interconnection cable. Moreover, the other FE/GE port on the LMPT board is connected to the transport network and GSM and LTE data is carried on the corresponding transmission link. If the eNodeB is configured with the UTRP board, an E1/T1 port on the UTRP board is connected to the transport network and GSM and LTE data is carried on the corresponding transmission link. Figure 8-4 Co-transmission with IP (GL mode)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


41



Figure 8-5 Co-transmission with IP (GL mode, the UTRP board used)

NOTE

The UTRP board is optional. It is not suitable for the co-transmission with IP mode, given its limited bandwidth that affects GSM traffic expansion. Therefore, using the UTRP board to achieve co-transmission with IP in GL mode is not recommended.

Co-Transmission Between NodeB and eNodeB If co-transmission between the NodeB and the eNodeB is required, as shown in Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7, an FE port on the WMPT board must be interconnected with an FE/GE port on the LMPT board using an FE interconnection cable. In this case, UMTS data is transferred over this FE interconnection cable. Moreover, the other FE/GE port on the LMPT board is connected to the transport network and UMTS and LTE data is carried on this transmission link. If the eNodeB is configured with the UTRP board, an E1/T1 port on the UTRP board can be connected to the transport network and UMTS and LTE data is carried on the transmission link. Figure 8-6 Co-transmission with IP (UL mode)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


42



Figure 8-7 Co-transmission with IP (UL mode, the UTRP board used)

NOTE

The UTRP is optional. It is not suitable for the co-transmission with IP mode, given its limited bandwidth that affects UMTS traffic expansion. Therefore, co-transmission with IP in UL mode is not recommended.

Throughput Specifications When the MBTS works in co-transmission with IP mode, the throughput specifications for each mode are as follows: l

GSM: 18 Mbit/s (bi-directional)

l

UMTS: 255 Mbit/s (45 Mbit/s in uplink and 210 Mbit/s in downlink)

l

LTE: 750 Mbit/s (300 Mbit/s in uplink and 450 Mbit/s in downlink)

8.2.3 Route Backup The MBTS can achieve route backup by using co-transmission with IP, which enables backup between traffic channels. When the MBTS supports route backup, each SiteUnit has two transmission channels, that is, the main channel and the backup channel. l

Main channel: When each SiteUnit connects to the transport network by using an independent physical transmission port, this independent transmission link is the main channel for each SiteUnit.

l

Backup channel: When the main control boards of two SiteUnits are interconnected by using FE/GE ports, each SiteUnit's independent transmission link serves as a backup channel for the other SiteUnit.

Usage scenarios of the route backup function are as follows:

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Scenario

Remarks

The main channel is faulty.

In this case, the route backup function can be enabled to enable switchover of transmission paths. Then, the system switches to the backup channel to ensure that maintenance and service data of high priority is not affected. After the main channel restores, the system automatically switches back to the main channel.


43



Scenario

Remarks

The transmission is not ready.

In this case, a SiteUnit can use transmission links of another SiteUnit to ensure that version management and other operations can be performed and completed properly.

Figure 8-8 shows the working principle of route backup when the main channel of the NodeB in an MBTS working in GU mode is faulty. This working principle also applies to other scenarios. Figure 8-8 Working principle of route backup

In the preceding figure, the GBTS and NodeB connect to the transport network by using independent physical transmission ports and the GTMU and WMPT boards are interconnected by using FE ports. Normally, the GBTS and NodeB use their own independent transmission links (that is, the main channel) to transmit data. That is, transmission of the GBTS does not affect that of the NodeB. If the main channel of the NodeB is faulty, the backup channel will be used and the NodeB's data is transferred to the GSM Transmission, Timing, and Management Unit for BBU (GTMU) board over the FE interconnection cable. Moreover, the transmission link of the GBTS (that is, the backup channel) will be used to ensure that high-priority Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


44



maintenance and service data will not be affected. After the main channel of the NodeB is restored, the system automatically switches back to the main channel to transmit data. For route backup achieved using co-transmission with IP, pay attention to the following information: l

In IP over E1 mode, route backup is not supported.

l

If the route backup function has been enabled on a physical channel, the hybrid transport function cannot be enabled on this channel.

l

Route backup can be enabled only by interconnecting FE/GE ports on main control boards. Interconnecting FE/GE ports on the UTRP board and a main control board cannot enable route backup.

l

In route backup scenarios, the IEEE1588 clock supports the backup switch of only unicast mode but not multicast mode.

l

Route backup depends on Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD). When the main channel is faulty, the operation, administration and maintenance (OAM), signaling, and key services of high priority are guaranteed preferentially. When the MBTS works in GU, GL, or UL mode, NodeB or eNodeB can use only BFD to bind the host-specific route. If UMTS or LTE does not use BFD to bind the host-specific route, the active and standby routes cannot be switched over, and therefore the route backup function cannot take effect.

l

If the MBTS works in UL mode and the main channel of the eNodeB is faulty, the QoS of high-priority data streams is guaranteed preferentially when the backup channel is used. This is because the NodeB processing capability is limited and the NodeB cannot support the entire eNodeB traffic.

l

If the MBTS works in GU or GL mode and the main channel of the NodeB or eNodeB is faulty, the QoS of high-priority data streams is guaranteed preferentially when the backup channel is used. This is because the GBTS processing capability is limited and the GBTS cannot support the entire NodeB or eNodeB traffic.

8.2.4 Hybrid Transport An MBTS working in UL mode can enable hybrid transport by using the co-transmission with IP mode. The MBTS working in UL mode supports the transfer of data over different transmission links by priorities. In this scenario, an FE port on the WMPT board is interconnected with an FE/GE port on the LMPT board to exchange information. The E1/T1 port on the WMPT board is connected to the transport network to bear services of high priorities. An FE/GE port on the LMPT board is connected to the transport network to bear low-priority services. There are three scenarios for hybrid transport: l

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Scenario 1: The UMTS traffic is transmitted on different paths whereas the LTE traffic is transmitted on one path, as shown in Figure 8-9.


45



Figure 8-9 Hybrid transport (scenario 1)

l

Scenario 2: The UMTS traffic is transmitted on one path whereas the LTE traffic is transmitted on different paths, as shown in Figure 8-10. Figure 8-10 Hybrid transport (scenario 2)

l

Scenario 3: Both UMTS traffic and LTE traffic are transmitted on different paths, as shown in Figure 8-11. Figure 8-11 Hybrid transport (scenario 3)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


46


9 MBTS Clock Schemes

9

MBTS Clock Schemes

About This Chapter The MBTS supports multiple external reference clock sources, including the E1/T1 reference clock, BITS reference clock, GPS reference clock, IP reference clock, and synchronous Ethernet clock. Each SiteUnit can use an external reference clock source independently or share the external reference clock source with another SiteUnit. When external reference clock sources are unavailable, the MBTS continues to work for at least 30 days in free-run mode. NOTE

In an MBTS, the Clock Working Mode cannot be set to AUTO(Auto), and each SiteUnit can be configured with only one type of external clock source.

9.1 Independent Reference Clock Mode When the MBTS works in independent reference clock mode, each SiteUnit uses an external reference clock source independently and clock characteristics are the same as those of a singlemode base station. 9.2 Common Reference Clock Mode When the MBTS works in common reference clock mode, two SiteUnits share the same external reference clock source.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


47



9.1 Independent Reference Clock Mode When the MBTS works in independent reference clock mode, each SiteUnit uses an external reference clock source independently and clock characteristics are the same as those of a singlemode base station. NOTE

When an MBTS adopts independent reference clock mode, each SiteUnit can use a different reference clock source according to onsite conditions. The related restrictions are as follows: l Each SiteUnit can be configured with only one type of reference clock source. l Only one Universal Satellite Card and Clock Unit (USCU) board can be configured for an MBTS and the USCU board can be configured with only one type of reference clock source.

Independent E1/T1 Reference Clock When each SiteUnit of an MBTS connects to the transport network by using its own E1/T1 transmission link and clock signals are carried on the link, each SiteUnit can obtain clock signals from its own E1/T1 port, as shown in Figure 9-1 and Figure 9-2. Figure 9-1 Independent E1/T1 reference clock (the main control board is connected to the transport network)

Figure 9-2 Independent E1/T1 reference clock (the UTRP is connected to the transport network)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


48



Independent IP Reference Clock When each SiteUnit of an MBTS is connected to the transport network by using its own FE/GE transmission link or co-transmission with IP is implemented by interconnecting FE ports, a client can be configured for each SiteUnit. In this manner, each SiteUnit can obtain its clock signals from the IEEE1588 server or IP clock server by using the FE/GE transmission link. Figure 9-3 shows the working principle of the independent IP reference clock when each SiteUnit of an MBTS uses an independent FE/GE transmission link. Figure 9-3 Independent IP reference clock (independent transmission)

Figure 9-4 shows the working principle of the independent IP reference clock when cotransmission with IP is implemented by interconnecting FE ports on an MBTS in GU mode. Figure 9-4 Independent IP reference clock (co-transmission with IP)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


49



NOTE

When the MBTS adopts co-transmission with IP, SiteUnits not connecting to the transport network directly cannot interpret the IEEE1588 clock signals because SiteUnits connecting to the transport directly do not support multicast forwarding, which is adopted by the IEEE1588 server to transmit clock signals.

Independent Synchronous Ethernet Clock When each SiteUnit of an MBTS is connected to the transport network by using its own FE/GE transmission link and the transport network supports the synchronous Ethernet clock, each SiteUnit obtains synchronized Ethernet clock signals carried on its own FE/GE transmission link from the transport network, as shown in Figure 9-5. Figure 9-5 Independent synchronous Ethernet clock

Independent BITS Reference Clock If a SiteUnit of an MBTS is configured with a USCU board and the BITS clock port on the USCU board is used to receive BITS clock signals, the SiteUnit can use the BITS clock signals independently. As shown in Figure 9-6, the GBTS is configured with a USCU board that receives BITS clock signals. Figure 9-6 Independent BITS reference clock (GBTS)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


50



Independent GPS/RGPS Reference Clock If a SiteUnit of an MBTS is configured with a USCU board and the GPS/RGPS clock port on the USCU board is used to receive GPS/RGPS clock signals, the SiteUnit can use the GPS/RGPS clock signals independently. As shown in Figure 9-7, the GBTS is configured with a USCU board that receives GPS clock signals. Figure 9-7 Independent GPS reference clock (GBTS)

NOTE

The NodeB does not support the RGPS clock reference source.

Independent 1PPS Reference Clock The eNodeB supports clock synchronization by using the 1 pulse per second (1PPS) reference clock. It obtains 1PPS and time of day (TOD) clock signals by using the 1PPS+TOD port on the USCU board, as shown in Figure 9-8. 1PPS signals are used for precise timekeeping and time measurement, while TOD signals transfer such information as time, types of reference clocks, and working status of reference clocks. Figure 9-8 Independent 1PPS reference clock (eNodeB)

9.2 Common Reference Clock Mode When the MBTS works in common reference clock mode, two SiteUnits share the same external reference clock source. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


51



NOTE

l The main control boards of two SiteUnits of an MBTS must be installed in the same BBU to achieve external reference clock source sharing. If an MBTS works in GU+L mode, only the GBTS and NodeB can share an external reference clock source. The external reference clock source cannot be shared between the GBTS and the eNodeB or between the NodeB and the eNodeB. l Currently, only the frequency synchronization method is supported for two SiteUnits to share an external reference clock source.

Common E1/T1 Reference Clock When a SiteUnit of an MBTS connects to the transport network by using an E1/T1 transmission link and clock signals are carried on the link, another SiteUnit can share the clock signals. In this case, another SiteUnit can be configured with a PEER clock source when the peer SiteUnit is configured with an E1/T1 clock source. Figure 9-9 shows that the GBTS obtains E1/T1 clock signals from an E1/T1 port on the GTMU board and the NodeB shares the E1/T1 clock signals. Figure 9-9 Common E1/T1 reference clock

If two SiteUnits both connect to the transport network through E1/T1 transmission links and the SiteUnits adopt common E1/T1 reference clock mode, the upper-level clock sources of the SiteUnits must be the same.

Common IP Reference Clock When the MBTS uses the IEEE1588 clock source, common IP reference clock mode is supported. In this case, one SiteUnit needs to be configured with a client and the SiteUnit can obtain clock signals from the IEEE1588 server by connecting to the transport network with a FE/GE transmission link. Then, another SiteUnit can be configured with a PEER clock source. Figure 9-10 shows that the NodeB obtains clock signals from the IEEE1588 server and the GBTS shares the clock signals.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


52



Figure 9-10 Common IP reference clock

NOTE

When the MBTS adopts co-transmission with IP, SiteUnits not connecting to the transport network directly do not support the IP clock in multicast mode because SiteUnits connecting to the transport directly do not support multicast forwarding.

Common Synchronous-Ethernet Clock When a SiteUnit of an MBTS connects to the transport network by using an FE/GE transmission link and the transport network supports the synchronous-Ethernet clock. In this case, another SiteUnit can be configured with a PEER clock source when the peer SiteUnit is configured with a synchronous-Ethernet Clock source. Figure 9-11 shows that the NodeB obtains Ethernet clock signals by using an FE/GE transmission link and the GBTS shares the Ethernet clock signals. Figure 9-11 Common synchronous-Ethernet clock

Common BITS Reference Clock When the MBTS is configured with the USCU board that is connected to an external BITS reference clock, the external BITS clock signals are routed to the MBTS through the BITS clock port. Each SiteUnit uses the clock signals directly through the clock channels on the backplane. In this scenario, two SiteUnits that share the reference clock source should be configured with this USCU board and should be configured with a BITS clock source. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


53



Figure 9-12 shows the working principle of the common BITS reference clock for the MBTS in GU mode. Figure 9-12 Common BITS reference clock

Common GPS Reference Clock When the MBTS is configured with the USCU board that is connected to an external GPS reference clock, each SiteUnit directly uses the 1PPS GPS clock signals from the USCU board over the clock bus. The GPS clock signals are routed to the RS485 port on the main control board of a SiteUnit and then are transmitted to the main control board of another SiteUnit through burst. In this scenario, two SiteUnits that share the reference clock source should be configured with this USCU board and should be configured with a GPS clock source. Figure 9-13 shows the working principle of the common GPS reference clock for the MBTS in GU mode. Figure 9-13 Common GPS reference clock

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


54


10


MBTS Operation and Maintenance

About This Chapter Operation and Maintenance (OM) function includes management, monitoring, and maintenance of the software, hardware, and configuration of the MBTSs. In addition, diversified OM modes are provided in various scenarios. 10.1 OM Modes MBTS operation and maintenance (OM) system includes such platforms as GBTS SMT, BSC LMT, NodeB LMT, eNodeB LMT and M2000 and provides local and remote OM for the MBTS. 10.2 Common Parts In an MBTS, common parts are those that are managed by multiple SiteUnits or by any SiteUnit. Based on loading control rights and the mode priority, SiteUnits manage software of common parts and maintain them. 10.3 Configuration Management MBTS configuration management includes initial configuration and reconfiguration. In the initial network deployment phase, the basic MBTS data can be configured on the CME to enable unified network deployment. After the MBTS has started running, reconfiguration can be performed on the CME or by running MML commands to add, delete, or modify data. 10.4 Software Upgrade The MBTS supports multiple upgrade methods in different scenarios. 10.5 Commissioning Mode The MBTS supports multiple commissioning modes in different scenarios and commissioning engineers can use the commissioning modes flexibly. 10.6 Alarm Management Each SiteUnit in an MBTS independently reports alarms. Maintenance personnel can individually manage all the SiteUnits or manage the entire MBTS as a whole. 10.7 Mode Evolution The MBTS supports many evolution solutions in different scenarios. 10.8 Inventory and Device Documentation Management MBTS inventory information and device documentation are managed on the M2000 to achieve centralized and effective management. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


55



10.9 Maintenance Between Modes During maintenance of an MBTS, maintenance operations must be performed carefully at each SiteUnit because the operations may affect other SiteUnits.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


56



10.1 OM Modes MBTS operation and maintenance (OM) system includes such platforms as GBTS SMT, BSC LMT, NodeB LMT, eNodeB LMT and M2000 and provides local and remote OM for the MBTS. l

GBTS SMT: Maintenance personnel connect a PC to the GTMU board by using an Ethernet cable and use the GBTS SMT installed on the PC to maintain devices managed by the GBTS of the MBTS.

l

BSC LMT: Maintenance personnel use the BSC LMT to maintain devices managed by the GBTS of the MBTS remotely.

l

NodeB LMT: Maintenance personnel use the NodeB LMT to maintain devices managed by the NodeB of the MBTS. To maintain a single NodeB, maintenance personnel can locally connect a PC where the NodeB LMT is installed to the WMPT board by using an Ethernet cable or remotely access the NodeB through an OM channel.

l

eNodeB LMT: Maintenance personnel use the eNodeB LMT to maintain devices managed by the eNodeB of the MBTS. To maintain a single eNodeB, maintenance personnel can locally connect a PC where the eNodeB LMT is installed to the LMPT board by using an Ethernet cable or remotely access the eNodeB through an OM channel.

l

M2000: As a network management center, the M2000 maintains multiple base stations in a centralized manner in terms of, for example, data configuration (on the CME), alarm monitoring, performance monitoring, software upgrade, and inventory management.

Description in this document assumes that only one network management system is used to manage the MBTS. If two or more network management systems are used, the methods for the MBTS OM, including alarm management, software management, inventory management, topology management, NE health check, commissioning, software upgrade, and data configuration, provided in this document do not apply. Figure 10-1 shows the OM system of the MBTS.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


57



Figure 10-1 OM system of the MBTS

SiteUnits communicate with each other internally and common parts are shared by the corresponding SiteUnits. Maintenance personnel can operate and maintain each SiteUnit independently by using the SMT or LMT locally or using the M2000 or LMT remotely. They can also manage the MBTS as an integrated entity by using the M2000. The M2000 manages the MBTS on its own interface to perform alarm management, software upgrade, data configuration, and inventory management in a centralized manner.

10.2 Common Parts In an MBTS, common parts are those that are managed by multiple SiteUnits or by any SiteUnit. Based on loading control rights and the mode priority, SiteUnits manage software of common parts and maintain them.

Common Parts and Parameters Common parts fall into two types. One type of common parts includes those that are managed by two or more SiteUnits, such as multi-mode RF modules working in multiple modes. The Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


58



other type of common parts includes those that can be managed by any SiteUnit, such as monitoring devices. Table 10-1 provides common parts in an MBTS and related management methods. Table 10-1 Common parts in an MBTS and related management methods Common Parts

Management Method

Multi-mode RF modules working in multiple modes

Bilateral management (mandatory): they are managed by SiteUnits that are chosen on the basis of the working mode of the modules. For example, a multi-mode RF module working in GU mode is managed by a GBTS and a NodeB.

BBU3900 subracks; UPEU, UEIU, and FAN in a BBU

Bilateral management (mandatory): They are managed by two SiteUnits whose main control boards are installed in the same BBU as the UPEU, UEIU, and FAN boards.

Local monitoring devices (monitoring devices connected to the BBU, including the PMU, TCU, FMU, and EMU)

Unilateral management: they are managed by one SiteUnit whose main control board is installed in the same BBU as the devices. NOTE l When monitoring boards are managed by only one SiteUnit, the following functions fail: Energy Saving, Smart TRX, and controlling fan speed by the main control board. l Monitoring devices are all connected to BBU0 and are managed by one SiteUnit whose main control board is installed in BBU0.

Remote monitoring devices (monitoring devices connected to RRUs) RET antennas

USCU

Unilateral management (only): l If RRUs work in a single mode, remote monitoring devices are managed by the SiteUnit that also manages these RRUs. For example, if RRUs work in the GSM mode, such devices are managed by the GBTS. l If RRUs work in multiple modes, remote monitoring devices are managed by one of the SiteUnits that also manage these RRUs. For example, if RRUs work in the GU mode, such devices are managed by the GBTS. Bilateral or unilateral management l Bilateral management: it is managed by two SiteUnits whose main control boards are installed in the same BBU as the USCU board. Note that the two SiteUnits must have the same clock source type. l Unilateral management: it is managed by one SiteUnit whose main control board is installed in the same BBU as the UCIU board. Note that this SiteUnit must be configured with a clock source type that matches the clock signals received by the USCU board. For other SiteUnits, their clock source type is PEER.

Cabinet

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Bilateral management (mandatory): It is managed by all the SiteUnits that are installed in the same cabinet. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59



Parameters of bilaterally managed common parts are common parameters. All SiteUnits involved must have the same configurations for these parameters. Otherwise, a configuration conflict alarm will be generated. For unilaterally managed common parts, users can choose a SiteUnit according to onsite conditions. For details, see the following: l

For a newly deployed MBTS, the GBTS is highly recommended, which is followed by the NodeB. The eNodeB is fairly recommended. For example, in a GU dual-mode base station, the GBTS is recommended.

l

For a base station to be evolved, the original mode is recommended. For example, a base station is evolved from a single mode base station to a GU dual-mode base station, the GBTS is recommended.

Loading Control Rights If a SiteUnit of an MBTS has loading control rights, the SiteUnit has software management rights over common parts. In addition, the software versions of common parts must be consistent with the software version of the SiteUnit. For example, a user grants loading control rights to the GBTS of a GU dual-mode base station. In this case, the GBTS has the software management rights over GU common parts and therefore the software version of the GU common parts must be consistent with that in the software package of the GBTS. Currently, loading control rights take effect on RF modules working in dual mode and the USCU board only. Parameters associated with loading control rights consist of Control Flag, Effect Immediately Flag, Self Version, Peer Version, and Mode. Description of these elements is provided in Table 10-2. For configuration methods, see the MML Command Reference. The local end indicates a SiteUnit that is setting loading control rights while the peer end indicates another SiteUnit that is involved in the operation. For example, when loading control rights are being set by the GBTS of a GU dual-mode base station, the GBTS is the local end while the NodeB is the peer end. Table 10-2 Parameters associated with loading control rights

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Parameter

Description

Remarks

Control Flag

Whether the local end has loading control rights

-


60



Parameter

Description

Remarks

Effect Immediately Flag

Whether the setting of loading control rights takes effect immediately

l If this parameter is set to YES(Effect Immediately), software of common parts will be updated immediately after the SET BTSLOADCTRL (GSM) or SET LOADCTRL (UMTS and LTE) command is executed. l If this parameter is set to NO(Effect Later), software of common parts will not be updated immediately after the SET BTSLOADCTRL or SET LOADCTRL command is executed. Instead, the software will be updated with the next software update performed at one end that is granted with loading control rights.

Self Version

Software version at the local end after the setting of loading control rights takes effect

Peer Version

The software version at the peer end after the setting of loading control rights takes effect

Mode

Mode information of common parts for which the setting of loading control rights takes effect. This parameter can be set to GU, GL, or UL.

The software versions at both the local end and the peer end should be considered jointly to ensure that the setting of loading control rights can take effect. For example, a user sets Self Version to A and Peer Version to B at the GBTS of a GU dual-mode base station. In this case, the setting of loading control rights takes effect when the software versions of the GBTS and NodeB are A and B respectively.

For a triple-mode base station, loading control rights need to be set separately in different mode combinations. For example, at the GBTS of a triple-mode base station, the loading control rights of GU and GL For example, if it is set to GU, common parts should be set separately. the setting of loading control rights takes effect for GU common parts only.

For each mode combination, users can set a maximum of two different loading control right records. Two records correspond to two software version combinations in each mode combination. One software version is the live combination while the other is the combination after upgrade. For example, the live version of GBTS of a GU dual-mode base station is A1 while the target version is A2; the live version of NodeB is B1 while the target version is B2. In this case, users can set two loading control right records for two software version combinations (A1B1 and A2B2) respectively. The last loading control right setting takes effect if two SiteUnits are granted with loading control rights in the same software version combination. The last loading control right setting also takes effect if neither of the SiteUnits is set to be granted with loading control rights. For example, at a GU dual-mode base station: Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


61



l

It is NodeB that has loading control rights in combination A1B1 if GBTS is granted with the rights first and NodeB is granted with the rights later.

l

It is GBTS that has loading control rights in combination A1B1 if, based on data configurations, GBTS is not granted with the rights first and NodeB is not granted with the rights later.

An Inter-System Control Rights Conflict alarm will be generated if loading control rights are not configured on two SiteUnits in the same software combination. Loading control rights need to be specified, modified, or pre-specified in the following scenarios: l

Loading control rights need to be reconfigured upon MBTS upgrade.

l

Loading control rights need to be reconfigured if loading control right conflicts arise.

None of the SiteUnits of an MBTS manages software of common parts if the following configuration conflicts arise and each SiteUnit works in non-engineering mode. l

The cabinet, subrack, and slot information of a common part are different among all SiteUnits.

l

The working mode of a common part is different among all SiteUnits. For example, if a multi-mode RF module is set to work in GU mode at the GBTS but it is set to work in UO mode at the NodeB, neither the GBTS nor the NodeB manages software of the module.

Mode Priority For bilaterally managed common parts, their alarms, configuration data, device status, and inventory information that are reported by each SiteUnit must be filtered and combined. The mode priority determines which SiteUnit's reported data is to be considered by the entire base station. Users can set an MBTS's mode priority on the M2000. In a GUL triple-mode base station, GSM has the highest mode priority while LTE has the lowest mode priority. In such a case, for common parts managed by both the GBTS and NodeB and common parts managed by both the GBTS and eNodeB, the data reported by the GBTS is to be considered by the base station. For common parts managed by both the NodeB and eNodeB, the data reported by the NodeB is to be considered by the base station. The mode priority setting takes effect not only for a single base station but also for all devices managed by the M2000 in the live network. Therefore, all the devices managed by the M2000 have the same mode priority setting.

10.3 Configuration Management MBTS configuration management includes initial configuration and reconfiguration. In the initial network deployment phase, the basic MBTS data can be configured on the CME to enable unified network deployment. After the MBTS has started running, reconfiguration can be performed on the CME or by running MML commands to add, delete, or modify data. Figure 10-2 shows the MBTS configuration management.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


62



Figure 10-2 MBTS configuration management

MBTS configuration data includes the unique data of each SiteUnit and the data of common parts. l

The method for configuring the unique data of each SiteUnit is the same as that for a singlemode base station.

l

Common Part and Management Method provides the principles for configuring the data of common parts. Unilaterally managed common parts need to be configured only on one SiteUnit. Bilaterally managed common parts must be configured on two related SiteUnits, which must have the consistent settings for common parameters.

Initial Configuration In the initial network deployment phase, the basic MBTS data can be configured on the CME after hardware of the MBTS has been installed and the MBTS has gained access to the M2000 successfully. Once the initial configuration is complete, the MBTS starts to function and provide basic services. One-site configuration can be performed on a GU/GL dual-mode base station by using the CME. There are two configuration methods available, as described in Table 10-3. For details, see the MBTS Initial Configuration. Table 10-3 Initial configuration method

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Configuration Method

Usage Scenario

Configuration Procedure

Based on the GUI wizard

Deployment of a single site

Shown in Figure 10-3.


63



Configuration Method

Usage Scenario

Configuration Procedure

Based on the data planning template

Deployment of batches of sites

Shown in Figure 10-4.

Figure 10-3 Initial configuration procedure (based on the GUI wizard)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


64



Figure 10-4 Initial configuration procedure (based on the data planning template)

The method for configuring the unique data of each SiteUnit is the same as that for a singlemode base station. Data of common parts needs to be configured once only. Characteristics of MBTS configuration are as follows, including functions of the CME available for MBTS configuration: l

A network carrier can specify mapping between SiteUnits of an MBTS.

l

The CME supports one-site configuration and configuration data consistency check. – Unique data of each SiteUnit is checked on the basis of check rules of each NE to ensure that the data is correct. – Each SiteUnit must have the correct configuration for a cabinet, subrack, or slot to prevent configuration conflicts. – Data of Bilaterally managed common parts is checked on the basis of mode priorities specified by network carriers and of check rules specified for the common device data. If parameter configurations of the common parts are found to be inconsistent between two SiteUnits, the CME modifies configuration data automatically based on the mode priority setting.

l

The CME provides an MBTS device panel view, supports unified addition or deletion of cabinets and boards, and enables unified modification of common parameters.

Reconfiguration Reconfiguration includes data addition, data removal, and data modification after the MBTS has started functioning. MBTS reconfiguration can be performed on the LMT by running MML commands or on the CME. Operations on the CME are recommended. During reconfiguration, Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


65



it is recommended that network carriers check configuration data consistency manually to ensure that parameter configurations of the common parts are consistent between SiteUnits. Table 10-4 describes usage scenarios of reconfiguration. Table 10-4 Usage scenario of reconfiguration Scenario

Remarks

Network optimization

Network performance is adjusted and optimized on the basis of the system operation data that is obtained during network operation by means of performance measurement and drive test.

Feature configuration

Key parameters of optional features are configured to activate the features. For details, see the SingleRAN Feature Activation Guide.

Capacity expansion

Hardware is added to the live network or configurations are modified. This enables the system to provide services for more users. For details, see the SingleRAN Reconfiguration. The configuration method, based on the GUI wizard, supports only capacity expansion from a single-mode base station to a dual-mode base station. Figure 10-5 shows the corresponding configuration procedure. The other method, based on the data planning template, supports capacity expansion from a dual-mode base station to a triple-mode base station. Figure 10-6 shows the corresponding configuration procedure.

Figure 10-5 Configuration procedure for capacity expansion (based on the GUI wizard)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


66



Figure 10-6 Configuration procedure for capacity expansion (based on the data planning template)

10.4 Software Upgrade The MBTS supports multiple upgrade methods in different scenarios. Table 10-5 lists methods for upgrading MBTS software in different scenarios. For details, see the corresponding Upgrade Guide. Table 10-5 MBTS software upgrade Upgrade Scenario

Upgrade Platform

Upgrading the GBTS independently

l M2000 l Local BSC6900 LMT l Local SMT

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Upgrading the NodeB independently

l M2000

Upgrading the eNodeB independently

l M2000

Upgrading the GBTS and NodeB simultaneously

M2000

Upgrading the GBTS and eNodeB simultaneously

M2000

l Local NodeB LMT

l Local eNodeB LMT


67



Upgrade Scenario

Upgrade Platform

Upgrading the NodeB and eNodeB simultaneously

M2000

Upgrading the GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB simultaneously

M2000

NOTE

During a one-sided upgrade, start event of common parts can be reported only by the SiteUnit that is being upgraded.

Version match check, loading control right setting, partial upgrade check are performed on the M2000 automatically, which simplifies the upgrade procedure. Therefore, upgrading remotely on the M2000 is recommended. Upgrade locally on the LMT or SMT if you encounter any problems when upgrading on the M2000 such as transmission faults occur, the M2000 is faulty or not installed, or the base station is commissioned locally. When upgrading an MBTS, pay attention to the following restrictions: l

In co-module scenario, software of all SiteUnits must be upgraded together.

l

In co-cabinet scenario, software of one SiteUnit can be upgraded independently. Services of another SiteUnit will be disrupted if the base station works in co-transmission mode and the SiteUnit to be upgraded provides an outgoing port used for transmission sharing.

l

For a triple-mode base station, software versions of three SiteUnits must be of V100R004.

l

During rollback, it is recommended that software of SiteUnits be rolled back together to ensure that software versions of the SiteUnits match after rollback. That is, if software of two SiteUnits is upgraded together, the software of the SiteUnites must be rolled back together as well. Rollback will not be allowed if rollback is performed on the M2000 and software versions of SiteUnits after rollback do not match.

l

If upgrade is started from V100R004, loading control rights are set at the base station automatically. If upgrade is started from a version earlier than V100R004 and it is performed on the M2000, loading control rights are set on the M2000 automatically. If the upgrade is not performed on the M2000, loading control rights must be set manually.

10.5 Commissioning Mode The MBTS supports multiple commissioning modes in different scenarios and commissioning engineers can use the commissioning modes flexibly.

Commissioning Scenario Table 10-6 lists MBTS commissioning scenarios.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


68



Table 10-6 MBTS commissioning scenario NE

Relevant Information

Remarks

Dual-mode base station (GU/GL/ UL)

Services of only one SiteUnit are provided when the base station is deployed.

The base station is deployed as a multi-mode base station. Due to resource insufficiency and other factors, however, services of only one SiteUnit are provided.

Services of two SiteUnits are provided when the base station is deployed.

The base station is deployed as a multi-mode base station and services of two SiteUnits are provided.

Services of one SiteUnit have been provided and services of the other SiteUnit will be provided in the near future.

Services of one SiteUnit have been provided and services of the other SiteUnit are not provided currently.

l GU+L

Commission a dual-mode base station and a singlemode base station separately based on the mode combination. For dual-mode base stations, see the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Commissioning Guide. For single-mode base stations, see the Commissioning Guide of the corresponding single-mode base station.

Triplemode base station

l GL+U

Commissioning Mode Different commissioning modes should be used according to the actual situation. Table 10-7 describes the commissioning mode used in a scenario where services of only one SiteUnit are provided during the deployment of an MBTS. For details, see the 3900 Series MultiMode Base Station Commissioning Guide. Table 10-7 Services of only one SiteUnit are provided when a base station is deployed

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Scenario

Operation

The base station works in co-transmission mode and the SiteUnit whose services are provided is not connected to the transport network directly.

1. Configure transmission data of the SiteUnit that is connected to the transport network directly.

l The base station does not work in cotransmission mode. l The base station works in co-transmission

1. Configure device data of the BBU and main control board of the SiteUnit whose services are not provided currently and import the configuration file into the main control board of this SiteUnit.

The base station works in GU or GL mode and GSM services are already provided.

2. Commission the SiteUnit whose services need to be provided by referring to the method for commissioning a singlemode base station.


69



Scenario

Operation

mode and the SiteUnit whose services have been provided is connected to the transport network directly.

The base station works in UL mode and services of only one SiteUnit are provided currently.

2. Manually shield alarms that do not affect services and commissioning of the SiteUnit whose services have been provided. 3. Commission the SiteUnit whose services need to be provided by referring to the method for commissioning a singlemode base station.

The base station works in GU or GL mode and only UMTS or LTE services are provided currently.

1. Manually shield alarms that do not affect services and commissioning of the SiteUnit whose services have been provided. 2. Commission the SiteUnit whose services need to be provided by referring to the method for commissioning a singlemode base station.

Table 10-8 describes the commissioning mode used in a scenario where services of two SiteUnits are provided or where services of only one SiteUnit are provided. For details, see the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Commissioning Guide. NOTE

When services of one SiteUnit has been provided normally while services of the other SiteUnit need to be provided, manually unshield the shielded alarms before commissioning.

Table 10-8 Services of two SiteUnits or only one SiteUnit are provided during the deployment of an MBTS Tool

Operation

USB

1. Upgrade software of the base station and download data configuration files.

NOTE The security of the USB loading port is ensured by encryption.

l GBTS SMT l NodeB/ eNodeB LMT

2. Observe LED indicators on boards and check whether hardware of the base station functions properly. 1. Upgrade software of the base station and download data configuration files. 2. Observe LED indicators on boards and check whether hardware of the base station functions properly. 3. Commission the base station to ensure that transport links function properly.

M2000

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Perform overall commissioning on the base station using the plug-and-play function of the M2000.


70



Operation personnel can complete commissioning on the M2000 remotely or through the collaboration with local engineers.

10.6 Alarm Management Each SiteUnit in an MBTS independently reports alarms. Maintenance personnel can individually manage all the SiteUnits or manage the entire MBTS as a whole. Figure 10-7 shows MBTS alarm management. For details, see the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Alarm Reference. Figure 10-7 MBTS alarm management

As shown in the preceding figure, the GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB report unique and common alarms independently and common alarms are reported with mode information such as GU common alarms and GUL common alarms. Maintenance personnel can individually manage the GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB using the GBTS SMT, NodeB LMT, and eNodeB LMT, respectively. Alternatively, they can centrally or independently manage MBTS alarms using the M2000. When centrally managing MBTS alarms, the M2000 combines and filters alarms reported by each SiteUnit based on the user-defined mode priority and provides one alarm view only.

Alarm Type Each SiteUnit in an MBTS reports unique and common alarms. l

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Unique alarms: These alarms are unique to a SiteUnit. Generation causes and processing mechanisms are the same as those for a single-mode base station.


71


l


Common alarms: These alarms, related to bilaterally managed common parts, include alarms that are generated because of device faults and alarms that are generated because of common parts' parameter configuration conflicts. NOTE

l For unilaterally managed common parts, only the SiteUnit that manage these common parts can see the alarms of them . Alarms reported by unilaterally managed common parts may affect the operation of other SiteUnits. On the Browse Current Alarm tab page, the Additional Information column lists the RAT_INFO and AFFECTED_INFO information. With the information, maintenance personnel can know the mode information about the base station where the alarm is generated and the modes that are affected by the alarm. l User-defined alarms specific to bilaterally managed common parts must be configured on all SiteUnits that manage these common parts. In addition, all these SiteUnits must have the same configuration for these alarms. Otherwise, a configuration conflict alarm will be generated. l If conflicts occur in common parameter configurations, multiple relevant alarms will be generated. Therefore, configuration conflict alarms must be handled preferentially.

Figure 10-8 shows the Browse Current Alarm tab page of the M2000. l

NE Type: indicates the SiteUnit that reports the current alarm.

l

Common Alarm Identifier: indicates whether the current alarm is a common alarm. If the value is NA, the current alarm is a unique alarm. Otherwise, the current alarm is a common alarm.

l

Additional Information: RAT_INFO indicates the mode information about the base station where the alarm is generated and AFFECTED_INFO indicates the modes that are affected by the alarm. For example, if the value for RAT_INFO is GUL and the value for AFFECTED_INFO is GU, the alarm is generated on a GUL triple-mode base station and this alarm affects the GSM and UMTS modes.

Figure 10-8 Browse Current Alarm tab page of the M2000

Management Method Maintenance personnel can individually manage all SiteUnits in an MBTS or manage the entire MBTS as a whole. For details, see Table 10-9.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


72



Table 10-9 Alarm management method Alarm Management Method

Tool

Description

Individually managing all SiteUnits in an MBTS

SMT/ LMT

The alarm management method is the same as that for a singlemode base station.

M2000

The alarm management method is the same as that for a singlemode base station.

Managing the MBTS as a whole

M2000

The M2000 exports only one alarm view, which includes common alarms and each SiteUnit's unique alarms. l For each SiteUnit's unique alarms, the method for managing the alarms is the same as that for a single-mode base station. l The M2000 combines and filters common alarms reported by each SiteUnit based on the user-defined mode priority and provides one alarm view only. This prevents some alarms from being repeatedly reported.

When using the M2000 to manage alarms, pay attention to the following: l

When setting parameters of common alarms, you must repeat the operation on all SiteUnits involved. Such parameters include alarm masking, alarm severity, alarm query, alarm clearance, and so on. Enabling the settings on one SiteUnit to take effect on the other SiteUnits is not allowed.

l

When confirming or clearing a common alarm, you must repeat the operation on all SiteUnits involved because the confirming or clearance only takes effect on the current SiteUnit. For example, both a GBTS and NodeB report a common alarm. Based on the mode priority, the M2000 displays only the alarm reported by the GBTS. After the alarm is confirmed or cleared, the alarm is removed from the GBTS. However, on the NodeB, the alarm remains unconfirmed and therefore it persists.

Mechanism for Handling Engineering Alarms When a base station is being deployed, upgraded, or commissioned, engineering operations cause some network elements (NEs) to being abnormal for a short period and as a result a large number of alarms are generated. This also occurs when the base station is under capacity expansion. All the generated alarms are called engineering alarms. Engineering alarms are automatically cleared after engineering operations are complete and therefore no operations are required. It is recommended that all NEs involved be set to work in engineering mode before any engineering operation is performed to mask engineering alarms. This avoids interfering network monitoring. After the SiteUnits involved enter engineering mode, the mechanism for handling engineering alarms works as follows: l

For SiteUnits working in engineering mode, their alarms are reported as engineering alarms.

l

For SiteUnits working in non-engineering mode: – Unique alarms are reported according to the normal procedure.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


73



– The alarms that are generated because of common parts' parameter configuration conflicts is not reported if a relevant SiteUnit is working in engineering mode. It is reported according to the normal procedure if none of the relevant SiteUnits is working in engineering mode. For example, when the GBTS of a GU dual-mode base station is working in engineering mode while the NodeB is working in non-engineering mode, all the alarms generated at the GBTS are reported as engineering alarms. In addition, the NodeB's unique alarms are reported according to the normal procedure but alarms that are generated because of common parts' parameter configuration conflicts are not reported.

10.7 Mode Evolution The MBTS supports many evolution solutions in different scenarios. Table 10-10 lists different mode evolution solutions. For details, see the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Standards Evolution Guide. Table 10-10 Typical evolution scenarios Scenario

Evolution Scenario

Remarks

Singlemode to dualmode

GO->GU

In this scenario, GSM single-mode is evolved into GU dualmode. Before evolution, only GSM services are provided. After evolution, GSM and UMTS services are both provided.

UO->GU

In this scenario, UMTS single-mode is evolved into GU dual-mode. Before evolution, only UMTS services are provided. After evolution, GSM and UMTS services are both provided.

GO->GL

In this scenario, GSM single-mode is evolved into GL dualmode. Before evolution, only GSM services are provided. After evolution, GSM and LTE services are both provided.

UO->UL

In this scenario, UMTS single-mode is evolved into UL dual-mode. Before evolution, only UMTS services are provided. After evolution, UMTS and LTE services are both provided.

GU->UO

In this scenario, GU dual-mode is evolved into UMTS single-mode and therefore GSM cells are out of service.

GL->LO

In this scenario, GL dual-mode is evolved into LTE singlemode and therefore GSM cells are out of service.

UL->LO

In this scenario, UL dual-mode is evolved into LTE singlemode and therefore UMTS cells are out of service.

GU->GU+L

In this scenario, GU dual-mode is evolved into GUL triplemode. Before evolution, only GSM and UMTS services are provided. After evolution, GSM, UMTS, and LTE services are all provided.

Dualmode to singlemode

Dualmode to triplemode Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


74


Scenario

Triplemode to dualmode


Evolution Scenario

Remarks

GL->GL+U

In this scenario, GL dual-mode is evolved into GUL triplemode. Before evolution, only GSM and LTE services are provided. After evolution, GSM, UMTS, and LTE services are all provided.

GU+L->UO+LO

In this scenario, GUL triple-mode is evolved into UL dualmode and therefore GSM cells are out of service.

GL+U->LO+UO

In this scenario, GUL triple-mode is evolved into UL dualmode and therefore GSM cells are out of service.

GU+L->GO+LO

In this scenario, GUL triple-mode is evolved into GL dualmode and therefore UMTS cells are out of service.

GL+U->GL

In this scenario, GUL triple-mode is evolved into GL dualmode and therefore UMTS cells are out of service.

MBTS mode evolution involves preparation before evolution, recording alarms, setting NEs to work in engineering mode, upgrading software, adjusting data, adjusting hardware, setting binding relations between SiteUnits, commissioning, and setting NEs to work in normal mode. l

Preparation before evolution: In this step, ensure that hardware and matching software required during evolution are ready and that each related NE and network management device are ready.

l

Recording alarms: In this step, record alarms generated on the base station for the comparison before and after evolution to ensure that no new alarm is generated after evolution.

l

Setting NEs to work in engineering mode: In this step, set a SiteUnit to work in engineering mode on the M2000 and shield engineering alarms to improve network operation and maintenance efficiency.

l

Upgrading software: In this step, upgrade software of the base station according to the actual situation to ensure that software versions are matching with each other.

l

Adjusting data: In this step, adjust configuration data of the base station to meet the actual requirements.

l

Adjusting hardware: In this step, adjust physical devices and connections of the base station to meet the actual requirements.

l

Setting binding relations between SiteUnits: In this step, set binding relations between SiteUnits on the M2000 to set up an MBTS.

l

Commissioning: In this step, commission the MBTS to ensure that it can work properly after evolution.

l

Setting NEs to work in normal mode: In this step, set NEs to work in normal mode on the M2000 to ensure that alarms are reported according to the normal procedure.

10.8 Inventory and Device Documentation Management MBTS inventory information and device documentation are managed on the M2000 to achieve centralized and effective management. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


75



Inventory Management Inventory management involves the logical inventory management (configuration information management) and physical inventory management (asset management). l

The logical inventory management manages logical inventory objects, including cells and versions.

l

The physical inventory management manages physical inventory objects, including racks, subracks, slots, boards, ports, antennas, and optical modules.

Figure 10-9 shows the MBTS inventory management. Figure 10-9 MBTS inventory management

Each SiteUnit of an MBTS independently reports its own inventory data, which covers inventory information about bilaterally managed common parts and this SiteUnit's unique inventory information including inventory information about unilaterally managed common parts. On the M2000, each SiteUnit's inventory data can be viewed and exported. All SiteUnits' data can also be combined on the M2000 and an inventory document covering the data is generated. The M2000 combines all SiteUnits' data on a mode priority basis.

Device Documentation Management Each SiteUnit of an MBTS performs device documentation management independently and sends a document recording device information to the M2000 separately. After all SiteUnits send their documents to the M2000, these documents are compressed into a file. Then, a tool is Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


76



used to combine these documents into an MBTS device document for the Customer Equipment Archives System (CEAS) to process the document.

10.9 Maintenance Between Modes During maintenance of an MBTS, maintenance operations must be performed carefully at each SiteUnit because the operations may affect other SiteUnits.

Maintenance Operations Simultaneously Performed at All SiteUnits Some maintenance operations must be performed at all SiteUnits of an MBTS at the same time. For details, see Table 10-11. Table 10-11 Maintenance operations that must be simultaneously performed at all SiteUnits Operat ion

GSM

UMTS

LTE

Remarks

Blockin g carriers or RF module s

l MML: SET GTRXADMST AT

l MML: BLK BRD

MML: BLK BRD

l To block an RF module that carries the services of two modes, block the RF module at two corresponding SiteUnits.

l SMT: See section Managing RCs > Changing the RC Management State in the SMT User Guide or DBS3900 GSM Site Maintenance Terminal User Guide.

l LMT: See section Managing NodeB Equipment > NodeB Board-Level Operations > Blocking/ Unblocking a NodeB Board in the NodeB LMT User Guide.

l LMT: See section BTS Maintenance > Modifying Administrative State in the BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


l Blocking RF modules can be performed at the NodeB or eNodeB. At the GBTS, this operation is not supported but carriers of RF modules can be blocked.

77



Operat ion

GSM

UMTS

LTE

Remarks

Blockin g cells

l MML: SET GCELLADMS TAT

MML: BLK LOCELL

MML: BLK CELL

A dual-mode RF module does not transmit power when the related cell is blocked at the corresponding SiteUnits.

l SMT: See section Managing Cells > Changing the Cell Management State in the SMT User Guide or DBS3900 GSM Site Maintenance Terminal User Guide. l LMT: See section BTS Maintenance > Modifying Administrative State in the BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide. TIP Before blocking a cell, you can run the MML command LST GCELL to query the configuration information about the cells under the base station.

Maintenance Operations That May Affect Services of Other SiteUnits When some maintenance operations are performed at one SiteUnit, services of other SiteUnits may be affected. For details, see Table 10-12.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


78



Table 10-12 Maintenance operations that may affect services of other SiteUnits Operat ion

GSM

UMTS

LTE

Impact

Setting loading control rights

MML: SET BTSLOADCTRL

MML: SET LOADCTRL

MML: SET LOADCTRL

l The software of a common part can be loaded and upgraded at the mode that has loading control rights. l When a multi-mode base station works in co-module mode, services at the peer end may be interrupted if the software of RF modules needs to be upgraded and Effect Immediately Flag is set to Yes.

Activati ng a base station

MML: ACT BTS

N/A

N/A

In any of the following scenarios, activating a base station on the local end interrupts services on the peer end: l RF modules serve multiple modes. l The base station adopts TDM-based co-transmission, and the local end provides a cotransmission port.

Deactiv ating a base station

MML: DEA BTS

N/A

N/A

In any of the following scenarios, deactivating a base station on the local end interrupts services on the peer end: l RF modules serve multiple modes. l The base station adopts TDM-based co-transmission, and the local end provides a cotransmission port.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


79



Operat ion

GSM

UMTS

LTE

Impact

Activati ng the base station softwar e

l MML: ACT BTSSW

MML: ACT SOFTWARE

MML: ACT SOFTWARE

l If the local end has loading control rights, activating software of RF modules serving multiple modes on the local end interrupts the peer end's services that are also carried over these RF modules.

l SMT: See section Managing Sites > Activating Software in the SMT User Guide or DBS3900 GSM Site Maintenance Terminal User Guide.

l When an MBTS adopts cotransmission and the local end provides a cotransmission port, activating software of the board providing the cotransmission port on the local end interrupts services on the peer end.

l LMT: See BTS Maintenance > Activating BTS Software in the BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide.

Rolling back the base station softwar e

MML: RBK BTSSW

MML: RBK SOFTWARE

MML: RBK SOFTWARE

l If the local end has loading control rights, rolling back the base station software on the local end interrupts the peer end's services that are carried over RF modules serving multiple modes. l If an MBTS adopts co-transmission and the local end provides a cotransmission port, rolling back the base station software on the local end interrupts services on the peer end.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


80



Operat ion

GSM

UMTS

LTE

Impact

Resettin g a base station

l MML: RST BTS

MML: RST NODEB

MML: RST ENODEB

l If RF modules serve multiple modes, resetting a base station on the local end interrupts the peer end's services carried over these RF modules.

l SMT: See section Managing Sites > Resetting a Site Hierarchically in the SMT User Guide or DBS3900 GSM Site Maintenance Terminal User Guide. l LMT: See section BTS Maintenance > Resetting the BTS by Levels in the BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


l If an MBTS adopts co-transmission and the local end provides a cotransmission port, resetting an MBTS on the local end interrupts services on the peer end. l During an MBTS reset, common part startups can be detected by the related managing SiteUnits.

81



Operat ion

GSM

UMTS

LTE

Impact

Resettin ga board

l MML: RST BTSBRD

l MML: RST BRD

MML: RST BRD

l SMT: See the SMT User Guide or DBS3900 GSM Site Maintenance Terminal User Guide.

l LMT: See section Managing NodeB Equipment > NodeB BoardLevel Operations > Resetting a NodeB Board in the NodeB LMT User Guide.

l Resetting a main control board: See Table 10-13.

– Resetting a board in the BBU: See section BBU Operations > Resetting a Board. – Resetting an RF module: See section RFU Operations or RRU Operations > Resetting a Board. l LMT: See section BTS Maintenance > Maintaining TRXs > Resetting the TRX in the BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


l Resetting an RF module: Resetting an RF module serving multiple modes on the local end interrupts the peer end's services that are also carried over this RF module. l Resetting a transmission board: When an MBTS adopts cotransmission and the local end provides a cotransmission port, resetting a board providing the cotransmission port on the local end interrupts services on the peer end.

82



Operat ion

GSM

UMTS

LTE

Impact

Resettin ga board in poweroff mode

SMT: See the SMT User Guide or DBS3900 GSM Site Maintenance Terminal User Guide.

MML: RST BRDPWROF F

MML: RST BRDPWRO FF

l Performing a power-off reset on a main control board: See Table 10-13.

l Resetting a board in the BBU in poweroff mode: See section BBU Operations > Resetting a Board in Power-Off Mode. l Resetting an RF module in power-off mode: See section RFU Operations or RRU Operations > Resetting a Board in Power-Off Mode.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


l Performing a power-off reset on an RF module: Performing a power-off reset on an RF module serving multiple modes on the local end interrupts the peer end's services that are also carried over this RF module. l Performing a power-off reset on a transmission board: When an MBTS adopts cotransmission and the local end provides a cotransmission port, performing a power-off reset on a transmission board providing the cotransmission port on the local end interrupts services on the peer end.

83



Operat ion

GSM

UMTS

LTE

Impact

Starting the VSWR detectio n

MML: STR BTSVSWRTEST

MML: STR VSWRTEST

MML: STR VSWRTEST

In any of the following scenarios, starting a VSWR test on the local end interrupts services on the peer end: l The test is conducted on RF modules serving multiple modes. l The test is conducted on RF modules that serve different modes but share antennas.

N/A Starting l SMT: See the section transmis Managing sion Sites > Testing perform Transmission ance test Performance in the SMT User Guide or DBS3900 GSM Site Maintenance Terminal User Guide.

N/A

If an MBTS adopts cotransmission and the local end provides a cotransmission port, conducting a transmission performance test on the local end interrupts services on the peer end.

l LMT: See section BTS Maintenance > Maintaining Site > Testing Transmission Performance in the BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


84



Operat ion

GSM

UMTS

LTE

Impact

Activati ng the configur ation baseline (CB)

N/A

MML: ACT CB

N/A

In any of the following scenarios, activating a CB on the local end interrupts services on the peer end: l RF modules serve multiple modes. l The base station adopts cotransmission, and the local end provides a cotransmission port.

Rolling back the CB

N/A

MML: RBK CB

N/A

In any of the following scenarios, rolling back a CB on the local end interrupts services on the peer end: l RF modules serve multiple modes. l The base station adopts cotransmission, and the local end provides a cotransmission port.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


85



Operat ion

GSM

UMTS

LTE

Impact

Starting the hardwar e test

N/A

MML: STR HWTST

N/A

l Starting a hardware test on RF modules serving multiple modes on the local end interrupts the peer end's services carried over these RF modules. l When an MBTS adopts cotransmission and the local end provides a cotransmission port, starting a hardware test on a board providing a cotransmission port on the local end interrupts services on the peer end.

Table 10-13 Impacts on other SiteUnits by resetting, performing a power-off reset on, or removing and then inserting a main control board CPRI base d Topo logy

Worki ng Mode of RF Modu les

Operation

Impact

Dualstar

GU/ GL

Resetting a main control board

l Resetting a GSM main control board – When GTMU software is being reset, UMTS or LTE CS and PS services may be interrupted. – When GTMUb software is being reset, the data rate of UMTS/LTE PS services may slow down, and UMTS/LTE CS services remain unaffected. l Resetting a UMTS or LTE main control board: When WMPT, LMPT, or UMPT software is being reset, the data rate of GSM PS services may slow down, and GSM CS services remain unaffected.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


86


CPRI base d Topo logy


Worki ng Mode of RF Modu les

Operation

Impact

Performing a power-off reset on a main control board

l Performing a power-off reset on a GSM main control board: During a power-off reset on a GTMU or GTMUb board, UMTS/LTE PS and CS services may be interrupted. l Performing a power-off reset on a UMTS or LTE main control board: During a power-off reset on a WMPT, LMPT, or UMPT board, the data rate of GSM PS services may slow down, and GSM CS services remain unaffected.

Removing and then inserting a main control board

l Removing and then inserting a GSM main control board: When a GSM main control board is restarting after being uninstalled and then installed, UMTS/ LTE PS and CS services may be interrupted. l Removing and then inserting a UMTS or LTE main control board: When a WMPT, LMPT, or UMPT board is restarting after being uninstalled and then installed, the data rate of GSM PS services may slow down, and GSM CS services remain unaffected.

UL

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Resetting, performing a power-off reset on, or removing and then inserting a main control board

Performing this operation on the UMTS or LTE side may slow down the data rate of the peer end's PS services but does not interrupt its CS services.


87


11


MBTS Surge Protection Specifications

This section describes surge protection specifications for each base station type and multi-mode RF modules. NOTE

l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications depend on the surge waveform of 8/20 μs. l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominal discharge current.

Surge Protection Specifications for the Ports on BTS3900 The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets have the same surge protection specifications, as provided in Table 11-1. Table 11-1 Surge protection specifications of ports on the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets Port

Surge Protection Mode

Specification

DC port

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

5 kA

Common mode

5 kA

AC port

Surge Protection Specifications for the Ports on BTS3900L The BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets have the same surge protection specifications, as provided in Table 11-2.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


88



Table 11-2 Surge protection specifications of ports on the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets Port


Specification

-48 V DC port

Differential mode

1 kA

Common mode

2 kA

Surge Protection Specifications for the Ports on BTS3900A The BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), and BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets have the same surge protection specifications, as provided in Table 11-3. Table 11-3 Surge protection specifications of ports on the BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), and BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets Port

Usage Scenario


Specification

-48 V DC output port (to remote devices)

Applicable to all scenarios

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Applicable to the scenario where transmission cabinets, battery cabinets, or BTS3900A (DC) is used

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Applicable to the scenario where only RFCs are used

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Applicable to the scenario where some devices are configured remotely or the scenario where BTS3900A is

Differential mode

30 kA

-48 V DC input port

AC port

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


89



Port

Usage Scenario


Specification

placed outdoors

Common mode

30 kA

Surge Protection Specifications for the Ports on BTS3900C Table 11-4 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet. Table 11-4 Surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet Port


Specification

DC input power port

Surge current

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

40 kA

Common mode

40 kA

AC input power port

Surge current

Surge Protection Specifications for the Ports on BBU3900 Table 11-5 describes the surge protection specifications for the ports on BBU3900. Table 11-5 Surge protection specifications for the ports on BBU3900

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Port

Usage Scenario


Specification

-48 V DC port

Applicable to the scenario where BBU3900 and devices interconnecte d through this port are

Differential mode

1 kA


90


Port

FE/GE port

GPS port

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


Usage Scenario


Specification

installed indoors

Common mode

2 kA

Applicable to the scenario where BBU3900 and devices interconnecte d through this port are installed indoors (surge)

Differential mode

0.5 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Applicable to the scenario where some devices are configured remotely or the scenario where BBU3900 and devices interconnecte d through this port are placed outdoors (surge protection board configured)

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Applicable to the scenario where some devices are configured remotely or the scenario where BBU3900 and devices

Differential mode

8 kA


91


Port

RGPS port

E1/T1 port

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


Usage Scenario


Specification

interconnecte d through this port are placed outdoors (surge protection module configured)

Common mode

40 kA

Applicable to the scenario where some devices are configured remotely or the scenario where BBU3900 and devices interconnecte d through this port are placed outdoors (surge protection module configured)

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Applicable to the scenario where BBU3900 and devices interconnecte d through this port are installed indoors

Differential mode

250 A

Common mode

250 A

Applicable to the scenario where some

Differential mode

3 kA


92


Port

Dry contact

RS485 alarm port

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


Usage Scenario


Specification

devices are configured remotely or the scenario where BBU3900 and devices interconnecte d through this port are placed outdoors (surge protection board configured)

Common mode

5 kA

Applicable to the scenario where BBU3900 and devices interconnecte d through this dry contact are installed indoors

Differential mode

250 A

Applicable to the scenario where some devices are configured remotely or the scenario where BBU3900 and devices interconnecte d through this dry contact are placed outdoors (surge protection board configured)

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Applicable to the scenario

Differential mode

250 A


93


Port

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


Usage Scenario


Specification

where BBU3900 and devices interconnecte d through this port are installed indoors

Common mode

250 A

Applicable to the scenario where some devices are configured remotely or the scenario where BBU3900 and devices interconnecte d through this port are placed outdoors (surge protection board configured)

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


94


12 MBTS Reliability

12

MBTS Reliability

The MBTS adopts a complete redundancy design, which greatly enhances system reliability.

Hardware Reliability l

Hardware reliability of the BBU3900 – The BBU3900 is equipped with built-in fans and supports redundancy configurations. With the intelligent temperature control technology, the BBU3900 can automatically adjust the fan speed and maintain the proper working condition of the heat dissipation system of the BBU. In this way, the noise from the fans reduces, the fan attrition rate slows down, and the reliability and durability of the heat dissipation system is enhanced. In addition, the BBU3900 can control the start/shutdown of the fans and report fanrelated alarms. – When one of the fans in the BBU3900 is faulty, the base station continues to work even if the system temperature specification is lowered by 10°C. – The power module is overcurrent-protected. – The BBU3900 supports overtemperature protection. When the temperature in the BBU is high, the BBU automatically reduces the power and/or shuts down the power amplifier, depending on the temperature. When the temperature becomes normal, the BBU cancels the overtemperature protection. – The optical module is hot-swappable, thus simplifying maintenance. – The BBU3900 provides the ports that receive the alarms related to the environment. – The power input port on the BBU3900 is capable of preventing misconnection and reverse connection.

l

Hardware reliability of the RRU3908 – Reliability design for input power: In the case of the DC power input, the permissible voltage range of the RRU3908 is from -36 V DC to -57 V DC. The RRU3908 is operational even when the peak input voltage reaches -60 V DC, thus preventing damages caused by unstable power input. – Overtemperature protection: When the temperature in the RRU is too high due to ambient factors, the RRU automatically enables the overtemperature protection function. When the temperature becomes normal, the RRU automatically disables the overtemperature protection function.

l Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Hardware reliability of the MRFU Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95


12 MBTS Reliability

– Reliability design for input power: In the case of the DC power input, the permissible voltage range of the MRFU is from -36 V DC to -57 V DC. The MRFU is operational even when the peak input voltage reaches -60 V DC, thus preventing damages caused by unstable power input. – Overtemperature protection: When the temperature in the MRFU is too high due to ambient factors, the MRFU automatically enables overtemperature protection. When the temperature becomes normal, the MRFU automatically disables the overtemperature protection.

Software Reliability The software reliability is considered as the error tolerance capability. When a software fault occurs, the self-healing ability protects the base station from breakdown. The error tolerance of the BBU3900 and RRU3908/MRFU software covers the following aspects: l

Scheduled check of key resources The base station checks software resource usage regularly. If resource deadlock occurs because of software faults, the system can release the unavailable resources in time and export logs and alarms.

l

Parameter check Validity check is performed on all the parameters of commands on the LMT and OMC. The data in the configuration files is also checked upon the system startup to ensure stable running of the system. During software running, the monitoring process monitors the task running status. If internal software errors and hardware faults are detected, the monitoring process reports alarms, and meanwhile attempts to restore the task by self-healing.

l

Protection against software faults Two software versions and two data versions are stored in the base station. If software upgrade fails, the system automatically rolls the version back to the pre-upgrade one, thus lowering the probability of onsite troubleshooting in the case of software download failures.

l

Data check The base station performs scheduled or event-triggered data consistency check and restores the data consistency selectively or preferentially. In addition, the base station generates related logs and alarms.

l

Storage of operation logs The base station records the operations performed during a period and stores the records in the operation logs. When the system incurs an unknown error, the maintenance personnel can identify the problem by tracing back to the normal status or can perform data restoration.

l

Backup The base station supports backup of transmission links.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


96



13

Technical Specifications

About This Chapter This section provides technical specifications for multi-mode RF modules. For technical specifications for single-mode RF modules, see the technical description for the single-mode base station in question. 13.1 Technical Specifications for RFUs This section provides technical specifications for RFUs, including supported modes, frequency bands, RF specifications, surge protection specifications, and antenna capabilities. 13.2 Technical Specifications for RRUs This section provides technical specifications for RRUs, including supported modes, frequency bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capabilities.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


97



13.1 Technical Specifications for RFUs This section provides technical specifications for RFUs, including supported modes, frequency bands, RF specifications, surge protection specifications, and antenna capabilities.

13.1.1 DRFU Technical Specifications The Double Radio Frequency Unit (DRFU) is an RF module based on the dual density technology. DRFUs are installed in indoor macro base stations (such as the BTS3900 and the BTS3900L) and the outdoor macro base station (such as TS3900A). DRFUs are usually used in scenarios requiring medium or small capacity. A DRFU supports a maximum of two carriers.

Modes and Frequency Bands Supported by a DRFU Table 13-1 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a DRFU. Table 13-1 Modes and frequency bands supported by a DRFU Type

Mode

Frequency Band (MHz)

Receive Frequency Band (MHz)

Transmit Frequency Band (MHz)

DRFU

GSM

900 EGSM

880 to 915

925 to 960

900 PGSM

890 to 915

935 to 960

1800

1710 to 1785

1805 to 1880

RF Specifications Table 13-2 lists RF specifications of a DRFU.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


98



Table 13-2 RF specifications of a DRFU Type

DRFU

Trans mit and Recei ve Chan nel

Capa city

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Receiver Sensitivi ty with One Antenna

Receiver Sensitivi ty with Two Antenna s

Receiver Sensitivi ty with Four Antenna s

2T2R

2 carrier s

-113

-115.8

-118.5

Output Power

Power Consum ption

DRFU (900 MHz) output power

Power consumpt ion (DRFU operating in 900 MHz configure d)

DRFU (1800 MHz) output power

Power consumpt ion (DRFU operating in 1800 MHz configure d)

NOTE

The configuration of S4 needs two DRFU modules.

Table 13-3 DRFU (900 MHz) output power Carrier Number

BCCH Carrier Output Power

1

45 W (GMSK)/30 W (8PSK)

2

45 W (GMSK)/30 W (8PSK)

4

20 W (GMSK)/14 W (8PSK)

1(PBT)

71 W (GMSK)/41 W (8PSK)

Table 13-4 DRFU (1800 MHz) output power

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Carrier Number

BCCH Carrier Output Power (1800 MHz)

1

40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99



Carrier Number

BCCH Carrier Output Power (1800 MHz)

2

40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)

4

18 W (GMSK)/12 W (8PSK)

1 (PBT)

63 W (GMSK)/42 W (8PSK)

Table 13-5 Power consumption (DRFU operating in 900 MHz configured) Cabinet

Configuration

Typical Power Consumption (W)

Maximum Power Consumption (W)

BTS3900

S2/2/2, TOC = 45 W

730

1060

BTS3900A

S2/2/2, TOC = 45 W

820

1190

Table 13-6 Power consumption (DRFU operating in 1800 MHz configured) Cabinet

Configuration



BTS3900

S2/2/2, TOC = 40 W

730

1050

BTS3900A

S2/2/2, TOC = 40 W

820

1190

Engineering Specifications Table 13-7 lists the equipment specifications of a DRFU. Table 13-7 Equipment specifications of a DRFU Type

Dimension (H x W x D)

Weight (kg)

DRFU

9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm (with the panel)

≤12

Table 13-8 describes the surge protection specifications for DRFU ports. NOTE


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


100



Table 13-8 Surge protection specifications for DRFU ports Port

Usage Scenario


Specification

DC power supply port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

Antenna port


Surge current

Ports for cascading RF modules


Surge

Dry contact or RS485 alarm port


Surge current

250 A

Differential mode

250 A

Common mode

250 A

Antenna Capabilities Table 13-9 shows antenna capabilities for a DRFU. Table 13-9 Antenna capabilities for a DRFU Type

TMA Capability

RET Antenna Capabilities

DRFU

Not supported

Supports AISG1.1

NOTE

l

An external BT is required if a DRFU needs to be configured with a TMA.

l

For RFUs supporting RET antennas, the feed voltage is 12 V and feed current is 2.3 A.

13.1.2 Technical Specifications for GRFU The GSM Radio Frequency Unit (GRFU) is an RF module based on the multi-carrier technology. GRFUs are installed in indoor macro base stations (such as the BTS3900 and BTS3900L) and Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


101



the outdoor macro base station (such as TS3900A). GRFUs are usually used in scenarios requiring large capacity. A GRFU supports a maximum of six carriers.

Modes and Frequency Bands Supported by a GRFU Table 13-10 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a GRFU. Table 13-10 Modes and frequency bands supported by a GRFU Type

Mode




GRFU V1

GSM

1900

1850 to 1890

1930 to 1970

1870 to 1910

1950 to 1990

900 PGSM

890 to 915

935 to 960

900 EGSM

880 to 915

925 to 960

1800

1710 to 1770

1805 to 1865

1725 to 1785

1820 to 1880

900 EGSM

885 to 910

930 to 955

1800

1710 to 1755

1805 to 1850

GRFU V2

GSM

GRFU V2a

GSM

RF Specifications Table 13-11 shows RF specifications for a GRFU. Table 13-11 RF Specifications for a GRFU Type

GRFU V1

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Trans mit and Receiv e Chann el

Capaci ty

1T2R

6 carriers

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Receiver Sensitivity with One Antenna

Receiver Sensitivity with Two Antennas

-113

-115.8


Output Power

Power Consumpti on

GRFU V1 (1900 MHz) output power

Power consumptio n (GRFU V1 operating in 1900 MHz configured)

102


Type

GRFU V2

GRFU V2a



Capaci ty



l 900 EGSM: -113.3

l 900 EGSM: -116.1

l 900 MHz PGSM/ 1800 MHz: -113.5

l 900 MHz PGSM/ 1800 MHz: -116.3

-113.5

-116.3

Output Power

Power Consumpti on


Power consumptio n (GRFU V2 operating in 900 MHz configured)


-

Power consumptio n (GRFU V2 operating in 1800 MHz configured) -

Table 13-12 GRFU V1 (1900 MHz) output power Carrier Number

BCCH Carrier Output Power (Power Sharing Disabled)

BCCH Carrier Output Power (Power Sharing Enabled)

1

60 W (GMSK)/40 W (8PSK)

60 W (GMSK)/40 W (8PSK)

2

40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)

40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)

3

27 W (GMSK)/18 W (8PSK)

31 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

4

20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)

27 W (GMSK)/18 W (8PSK)

5

12 W (GMSK)/8 W (8PSK)

20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)

6

10 W (GMSK)/6.6 W (8PSK)

16 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)

NOTE

The maximum output power of a GRFU V1 module in the configuration of S1 is 60 W. To achieve the maximum output power, you need to buy a license.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


103






1

60 W (GMSK)/60 W (8PSK)

60 W (GMSK)/60 W (8PSK)

2

40 W (GMSK)/40 W (8PSK)

40 W (GMSK)/40 W (8PSK)

3

27 W (GMSK)/27 W (8PSK)

31 W (GMSK)/31 W (8PSK)

4

20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

27 W (GMSK)/27 W (8PSK)

5

16 W (GMSK)/16 W (8PSK)

20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

6

12 W (GMSK)/12 W (8PSK)

20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

NOTE

l The maximum output power of a GRFU V2 module in the configuration of S1 is 60 W. To achieve the maximum output power, you need to buy a license. l After design optimization, GRFU V2 modules with the configuration of S1 to S3 have the same output power no matter they use the Gaussian minimum shift-frequency keying (GMSK) or 8 phase shift keying (8PSK) modulation scheme. l With the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature, GRFU V2 modules with the configuration of S4 to S6 can also have the same output power no matter they use the GMSK or 8PSK modulation scheme.




1

60 W (GMSK)/40 W (8PSK)

60 W (GMSK)/40 W (8PSK)

2

40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)

40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)

3

27 W (GMSK)/18 W (8PSK)

31 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

4

20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

27 W (GMSK)/27 W (8PSK)

5

16 W (GMSK)/16 W (8PSK)

20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

6

12 W (GMSK)/12 W (8PSK)

20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

NOTE

l The maximum output power of a GRFU V2 module in the configuration of S1 is 60 W. To achieve the maximum output power, you need to buy a license. l With the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature, GRFU V2 modules with the configuration of S4 to S6 can also have the same output power no matter they use the GMSK or 8PSK modulation scheme.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


104



Table 13-15 Power consumption (GRFU V1 operating in 1900 MHz configured) Cabinet

Configuration



BTS3900

S4/4/4, TOC = 20 W

710

1310

S6/6/6, TOC = 16 W

710

1370

S4/4/4, TOC = 20 W

790

1470

S6/6/6, TOC = 16 W

790

1540

BTS3900A


Configuration



BTS3900

S4/4/4, TOC = 20 W

680

1300

S6/6/6, TOC = 20 W

710

1190

S4/4/4, TOC = 20 W

760

1470

S6/6/6, TOC = 20 W

790

1340

S4/4/4 + 1800 MHz S8/8/8, TOC = 20 W

1800

3730

BTS3900A

BTS3900L


Configuration



BTS3900

S4/4/4, TOC = 20 W

670

1290

S6/6/6, TOC = 20 W

770

1270

S4/4/4, TOC = 20 W

750

1450

BTS3900A

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


105



Cabinet

Configuration



S6/6/6, TOC = 20 W

860

1430

NOTE

l The following functions are configured: multi-carrier intelligent voltage regulation, TRX working voltage adjustment, discontinuous transmission (DTX), power control, and power sharing. l The preceding tables use the power consumption of BTS3900 -48 V DC, BTS3900A AC, and BTS3900L -48 V DC as examples. l TOC in the preceding table refers to the cabinet-top power of BTSs with duplex ports.

Engineering Specifications Table 13-18 lists the equipment specifications of a GRFU. Table 13-18 Equipment specifications of a GRFU Type


Weight (kg)

GRFU V1, GRFU V2, and GRFU V2a


≤12

Table 13-19 describes the surge protection specifications for GRFU ports. NOTE


Table 13-19 Surge protection specifications for GRFU ports Port

Usage Scenario


Specification



Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Surge current

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


106



Port

Usage Scenario


Specification

Antenna port


Surge current

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA



Surge



Surge current

250 A

Differential mode

250 A

Common mode

250 A

Antenna Capabilities Table 13-20 shows GRFU antenna capabilities. Table 13-20 GRFU antenna capabilities Type

TMA Capability


GRFU V1

Supported

Supports AISG2.0

GRFU V2

Supported

Supports AISG2.0

GRFU V2a

Supported

Supports AISG2.0

NOTE


13.1.3 Technical Specifications for WRFU The WCDMA Radio Filter Unit (WRFU) is an indoor radio frequency (RF) processing unit. One WRFU supports a maximum of four carriers.

Supported Modes and Frequency Bands Table 13-21 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFU.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


107



Table 13-21 Modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFU Type

Mode


RX Frequency Band (MHz)

TX Frequency Band (MHz)

80 W WRFU

UMTS

2100

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170

850

824 to 835

869 to 880

2100

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170

40 W WRFU

RF Specifications Table 13-22 lists RF specifications of a WRFU. Table 13-22 RF specifications of a WRFU Type

WRFU

RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Receive r Sensiti vity with One Antenn a

Receive r Sensitiv ity with Two Antenn as

Receive r Sensitiv ity with Four Antenn as

1T2R

l 80 W WRF U: 4 carrie rs

l -125. 8 (210 0 MHz )

l -128. 6 (2100 MHz )

l -131. 3 (2100 MHz )

l -128. 4 (850 MHz )

l -131. 1 (850 MHz )

l 40 W WRF U: 2 carrie rs

l -125. 6 (850 MHz )

Power

Power Consu mption

l Outp ut powe r of 80 W WRF U in typic al confi gurat ion

Power consum ption

l Outp ut powe r of 40 W WRF U in typic al confi gurat ion

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


108



NOTE

l The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS25.104, at the antenna connector over the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 0.001. l The receiver sensitivity on the 850 MHz band is measured on its subbands.

The 80 W WRFU supports a maximum of four carriers and uneven power configuration. The output power at its antenna port is 80 W. Table 13-23 Output power of 80 W WRFU in typical configuration Number of Carriers

Maximum Output Power per Carrier (W)

1

60

2

40*

3

20

4

20

NOTE

l

Maximum output power = Maximum output power of the PA - Internal loss. The maximum output power is measured at the antenna port.

l

The asterisk (*) marks the maximum output power in typical configuration.

The 40 W WRFU supports a maximum of two carriers. The output power at its antenna port is 40 W. Table 13-24 Output power of 40 W WRFU in typical configuration Number of Carriers


1

40

2

20

Table 13-25 Power consumption Cabinet

BTS390 0

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Config uration (Carrier x Sector)

Output Power per Carrier (W)

Typical Power Consu mption (W)

Maxim um Power Consu mption (W)

Power backup duration based on new batteries and typical power consumption (hour) 50Ah

92Ah

184Ah

3x1

20

390

450

5.6

11.3

22.6

3x2

20

455

600

4.6

9.5

19.4


109


Cabinet

BTS390 0A

BTS390 0L






Power backup duration based on new batteries and typical power consumption (hour) 50Ah

92Ah

184Ah

3x3

20

580

745

3.5

7.2

14.5

3x4

20

730

1030

2.5

5.1

15.2

3x1

20

390

450

5.6

11.3

22.6

3x2

20

455

600

4.6

9.5

19.4

3x3

20

580

745

3.5

7.2

14.5

3x4

20

730

1030

2.5

5.1

15.2

3x1

20

410

475

5.2

10.7

21.5

3x2

20

480

625

4.3

9.0

18.4

3x3

20

605

770

3.2

6.9

14.6

3x4

20

755

1055

2.5

5.2

11.7

NOTE

l Typical power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 40% load at the 25°C ambient temperature. l Maximum power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 100% load at the 25°C ambient temperature. l In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured. l In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

Engineering Specifications Table 13-26 lists the equipment specifications of a WRFU. Table 13-26 Equipment specifications of a WRFU Type


Weight (kg)

WRFU


≤12

Table 13-27 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFU.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


110



NOTE


Table 13-27 Surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFU Port

Usage Scenario


Specifications

DC power port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

Antenna port


Surge current

Port for RF module cascading


Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current


Surge current

RET antenna port


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


111



Port

Usage Scenario


Specifications

Local power monitoring and alarm port

Monitored power and RRUs are installed in back-toback mode or within 1 m.

Surge

250 A

Antenna Capability Table 13-28 lists the antenna capability of a WRFU. Table 13-28 Antenna capability of a WRFU Type

TMA Support

RET Antenna Support

WRFU

Supported

AISG2.0

NOTE

For RFUs supporting RET antennas, the feeding voltage is 12 V and feeding current is 2.3 A.

13.1.4 Technical Specifications for WRFUd The WCDMA Radio Filter Unit type D (WRFUd) is an indoor radio frequency (RF) processing unit. One WRFUd supports a maximum of four carriers.

Supported Modes and Frequency Bands Table 13-29 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFUd. Table 13-29 Modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFUd Type

Mode




WRFUd

UMTS

2100

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170

RF Specifications Table 13-30 lists RF specifications of a WRFUd.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


112



Table 13-30 RF specifications of a WRFUd Type

WRFUd

RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y




2T2R

l With MIM O: 4 carrie rs

-126.1

-128.9

-131.6

l With out MIM O: 6 carrie rs

Power

Power Consu mption

l Outp ut powe r of WRF Ud with out MIM O

Power consum ption

l Outp ut powe r of WRF Ud with MIM O l Carr ier comb inati ons supp orted by WRF Ud in hybri d confi gurat ions

NOTE

The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS25.104, at the antenna connector over the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 0.001.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


113



WRFUds with MIMO and without MIMO support four carriers and six carriers, respectively. The output power at its antenna port is 2 x 60 W. NOTE

l

Configurations of single-output, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO), or combination of the two are supported.

l

Uneven power configuration is supported.

Table 13-31 Output power of WRFUd without MIMO Number of Related to Amplifier 1

Carriers Power

Number of Related to Amplifier 2

Carriers Power


1

0

60

2

0

30

3

0

20

4

0

15

1

1

60

2

2

30

3

3

20

Table 13-32 Output power of WRFUd with MIMO Number of MIMO Carriers


1

40 + 40

2

30 + 30

3

20 + 20

4

15 + 15

Table 13-33 Carrier combinations supported by WRFUd in hybrid configurations

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Number of MIMO Carriers

Number of Single-Output Carriers

1

5

2

4

3

2


114



NOTE

With hybrid configurations, the WRFUd module supports a maximum of six carriers and each transmit channel supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power of each transmit channel is 60 W. For the output power of a MIMO carrier, see Table 13-32. For the output power of a single-output carrier, see Table 13-31.


BTS390 0

BTS390 0A

BTS390 0L





Power Backup Duration Estimated Based on Typical Power Consumption of New Batteries (Hours) 50 Ah

92 Ah

184 Ah

3x1

20

465

540

4.4

9.3

18.9

3x2

20

545

680

3.7

7.9

16.2

3x3

20

685

880

2.9

5.9

12.8

3x4

20

925

1225

2.0

4.1

9.3

3x1

20

465

540

4.4

9.3

18.9

3x2

20

545

680

3.7

7.9

16.2

3x3

20

685

880

2.9

5.9

12.8

3x4

20

925

1225

2.0

4.1

9.3

3x1

20

495

570

4.1

8.7

17.8

3x2

20

575

710

3.5

7.3

15.3

3x3

20

715

910

2.7

5.6

12.3

3x4

20

955

1255

1.9

3.9

9.0

NOTE

l Typical power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 40% load at the 25°C ambient temperature. l Maximum power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 100% load at the 25°C ambient temperature. l In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPd2 board and one WMPT board are configured in the BBU3900. l In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured in the BBU3900.

Engineering Specifications Table 13-35 lists the equipment specifications of a WRFUd.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


115



Table 13-35 Equipment specifications of a WRFUd Type


Weight (kg)

WRFUd


≤12

Table 13-36 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFUd. NOTE


Table 13-36 Surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFUd Port

Usage Scenario


Specifications

DC power port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

Antenna port


Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current

RET antenna port

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


116



Port

Usage Scenario


Specifications



Surge current

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA



Surge

250 A

Antenna Capability Table 13-37 lists the antenna capability of a WRFUd. Table 13-37 Antenna capability of a WRFUd Type

TMA Support

RET Antenna Support

WRFUd

Supported

AISG2.0

NOTE

For RFUs supporting RET antennas, the feeding voltage is 12 V and feeding current is 2.3 A.

13.1.5 Technical Specifications for WRFUe The WCDMA Radio Filter Unit type D (WRFUe) is an indoor radio frequency (RF) processing unit. One WRFUe supports a maximum of four carriers.

Supported Modes and Frequency Bands Table 13-38 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFUe. Table 13-38 Modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFUe

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Type

Mode




WRFUe

UMTS

2100

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170


117



RF Specifications Table 13-39 lists RF specifications of a WRFUe. Table 13-39 RF specifications of a WRFUe Type

WRFUe

RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y




2T2R


-126.1

-128.9

-131.6


Power

Power Consu mption

Output power of WRFUd without MIMO

Power consum ption

Output power of WRFUe with MIMO Output power of WRFUe in combine d configur ation

NOTE

The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS25.104, at the antenna connector over the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 0.001.

WRFUes with MIMO and without MIMO support four carriers and six carriers, respectively. The output power at its antenna port is 2 x 60 W. NOTE

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l


l



118



Table 13-40 Output power of WRFUe without MIMO Number of Related to Amplifier 1

Carriers Power


Carriers Power


1

0

80

2

0

40

3

0

26

4

0

20

1

1

80

2

2

40

3

3

26

Table 13-41 Output power of WRFUe with MIMO Number of Carriers


1

40 + 40

2

40 + 40

3

26 + 26

4

20 + 20

Table 13-42 Output power of WRFUe in combined configuration Number of MIMO Carriers


1

5

2

4

3

2

NOTE

In combined configuration, each TX channel of the WRFUe supports a maximum of four carriers, and the WRFUe supports a maximum of six carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


119




BTS390 0

BTS390 0A

BTS390 0L

BTS390 0AL






92 Ah

184 Ah

3x1

20

465

540

4.4

9.3

18.9

3x2

20

545

680

3.7

7.9

16.2

3x3

20

685

880

2.9

5.9

12.8

3x4

20

820

1090

2.3

4.7

10.7

3x1

20

495

570

4.1

8.7

17.8

3x2

20

575

710

3.5

7.3

15.3

3x3

20

715

910

2.7

5.6

12.3

3x4

20

850

1120

2.1

4.4

10.3

3x1

20

495

570

4.1

8.7

17.8

3x2

20

575

710

3.5

7.3

15.3

3x3

20

715

910

2.7

5.6

12.3

3x4

20

850

1120

2.1

4.4

10.3

3x1

20

510

585

4.0

8.4

17.3

3x2

20

590

725

3.5

7.1

14.9

3x3

20

730

925

2.6

5.5

12.1

3x4

20

865

1135

2.1

4.3

10.2

NOTE

l Typical power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 40% load at the 25°C ambient temperature. l Maximum power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 100% load at the 25°C ambient temperature. l In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPd2 board and one WMPT board are configured in the BBU3900. l In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured in the BBU3900.

Engineering Specifications Table 13-44 lists the engineering specifications of a WRFUe.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


120



Table 13-44 Equipment specifications of a WRFUe Type


Weight (kg)

WRFUe


≤12

Table 13-45 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFUe. Table 13-45 Surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFUe Port

Usage Scenario


Specifications

DC power port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

Antenna port


Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current


Surge current

RET antenna port


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


121



Port

Usage Scenario


Specifications



Surge

250 A

Antenna Capability Table 13-46 lists the antenna capability of a WRFUe. Table 13-46 Antenna capability of a WRFUe Type

TMA Support

RET Antenna Support

WRFUe

Supported

AISG2.0

NOTE

For RRUs supporting RET antennas, the feeding voltage is 12 V and feeding current is 2.3 A.

13.1.6 Technical Specifications for LRFU This section describes the technical specifications of the LRFU.

Working Mode and Frequency Band Table 13-47 describes the working mode and frequency bands of the LRFU. Table 13-47 Working mode and frequency bands of the LRFU

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Type

Worki ng Mode


RX Band (MHz)

TX Band (MHz)

LRFU

LTE FDD

AWS (band 4)

1710 to 1755

2110 to 2155

2600 (band 7)

Band C: 2500 to 2520

Band C: 2620 to 2640

Band D: 2510 to 2560

Band D: 2630 to 2680

Band E: 2550 to 2570

Band E: 2670 to 2690


122



RF Specifications Table 13-48 describes the RF specifications of the LRFU. The receiver sensitivity, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, is measured under 5 MHz channel bandwidth @ FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R=1/3, 25 RB). Table 13-48 RF specifications of the LRFU Type

LRF U

RX and TX Chan nels

Capacity

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)

2T2R

One carrier. The bandwidth of each carrier can be:

1T1R

1T2R

l 2600: -105.8

l 2600 : -108 .6

l AWS: -106.1

l 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz in the AWS band

Output Power (W)

Power Consumption (W)

2 x 40

l 2600: 350 l AWS: 370

l AW S: -108 .9

l 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz in the 2600 MHz band

NOTE

A x B in Output Power (W) indicates that the eNodeB uses A transmit (TX) channels and the output power of each channel is B W.

Engineering Specifications Table 13-49 describes the physical specifications of the LRFU. Table 13-49 Equipment specifications of an LRFU Type

Dimensions (H x W x D)

Weight (kg)

LRFU

9U x 14HP x 308.5mm (with the panel)

12

Table 13-50 describes the surge protection specifications for the ports on the LRFU. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


123



NOTE

l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications are based on the surge waveform of 8/20 μs. l All the items of discharge current, unless otherwise specified as the maximum discharge current, refer to those of the nominal discharge current.

Table 13-50 Surge protection specifications for the ports on the LRFU Port

Applicatio n Scenario


Specification

DC power supply socket

All

Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Surge current

Antenna port

Monitoring port

All

All

Surge current

Surge current

Antenna Capability Table 13-51 describes the antenna capability of the LRFU. Table 13-51 Antenna capability of the LRFU Type

TMA Support Capability

RET Antenna Support Capability

LRFU

TMA supported

AISG2.0-complied RET antennas supported

NOTE

If an RRU supports RET antennas, the feeding voltage and feeding current are 12 V and 2.3 A, respectively.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


124



13.1.7 Technical Specifications for LRFUe This section describes the technical specifications of the LRFUe.

Working Mode and Frequency Band Table 13-52 describes the working mode and frequency bands of the LRFUe. Table 13-52 Working mode and frequency bands of the LRFUe Type

Worki ng Mode


RX Band (MHz)

TX Band (MHz)

LRFUe

LTE FDD

DD 800MHz (band 20)

832 to 862

791 to 821

RF Specifications Table 13-53 describes the RF specifications of the LRFUe. The receiver sensitivity, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, is measured under 5 MHz channel bandwidth @ FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R=1/3, 25 RB). Table 13-53 RF specifications of the LRFUe Type

LRF Ue

RX and TX Chan nels

Capacity

2T2R

One carrier. The bandwidth of each carrier can be 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz.

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) 1T1R

1T2R

-106.3

-109.1

Output Power (W)

Power Consumpt ion (W)

2 x 60

440

NOTE


Engineering Specifications Table 13-54 describes the physical specifications of the LRFUe.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


125



Table 13-54 Equipment specifications of an LRFUe Type


Weight (kg)

LRFUe

9U x 14HP x 308.5mm (with the panel)

12

Table 13-55 describes the surge protection specifications for the ports on the LRFUe. NOTE


Table 13-55 Surge protection specifications for the ports on the LRFUe Port



Specification


All

Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Surge current

Antenna port

Monitoring port

All

All

Surge current

Surge current

Antenna Capability Table 13-56 describes the antenna capability of the LRFUe.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


126



Table 13-56 Antenna capability of the LRFUe Type



LRFUe

TMA supported


NOTE


13.1.8 Technical Specifications for MRFU MRFUs are classified into MRFU V1, MRFU V2 and MRFU V2a. Adopting the softwaredefined radio (SDR) technology, MRFU modules can work in different modes with different configurations.

Supported Modes and Frequency Bands Table 13-57 shows the modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFU. Table 13-57 Modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFU Type




Mode

MRFU V1

900

890 to 915

935 to 960

GSM and UMTS

1800

1710 to 1755

1805 to 1850

GSM

1740 to 1785

1835 to 1880

1850 to 1890

1930 to 1970

1870 to 1910

1950 to 1990

850

824 to 846.5

869 to 891.5

GSM, UMTS, and GSM + UMTS

900

890 to 915

935 to 960

880 to 915

925 to 960

GSM, UMTS, LTE, GSM + UMTS, and GSM + LTE

1710 to 1770

1805 to 1865

1725 to 1785

1820 to 1880

1710 to 1785

1805 to 1880

1900

MRFU V2

1800

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


GSM and UMTS

GSM, LTE, and GSM + LTE

127



Type




Mode

MRFU V2a

900

885 to 910

930 to 955


1800

1710 to 1755

1805 to 1850

GSM, LTE, and GSM + LTE

RF Specifications Table 13-58 shows RF specifications for an MRFU. NOTE

l The GSM receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 51.021, over the central band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 13 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 2%. The central band is the 80% of the full band. l The UMTS receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, over the full band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the BER does not exceed 0.001. l The LTE receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, under a 5 MHz channel bandwidth 5 MHz channel bandwidth based on the FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R = 1/3, 25 RBs) standard. l MRFU modules operating in GSM mode and in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band comply with the standard EN 301 502 V9.2.1. l MRFU modules operating in GSM mode and in the 850 or 1900 MHz frequency band comply with the standard 3GPP TS 45.005 V10.2.0 & 3GPP TS 51.021 V10.2.0. l MRFU modules operating in UMTS, LTE, or Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) mode and in 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band comply with the standard ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104. l MRFU modules operating in UMTS, LTE, or Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) mode and in 850 or 1900 MHz frequency band comply with the standard 3GPP TS 37.104 V10.4.0 & TS 37.141 V10.4.0. l AB Non-MSR indicates that A data is carried on one transmit channel of an RF module while B data is carried on the other transmit channel of the RF module. AB MSR indicates that A and B data is carried on the same transmit channel of an RF module.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


128



Table 13-58 RF specifications for an MRFU Ty pe

Tr an s mi t an d Re ce iv e C ha nn el s

Capacit y

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) 1-Way Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)

2-Way Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)


MR FU V1

1T 2R

GSM: 6 TRXs

GSM: -113

GSM: -115.8

GSM: -118.5 (theoretical value)

UMTS: 4 carriers

UMTS: -125.5

UMTS: -128.3

UMTS: -131

MR FU V2

1T 2R

GSM: 6 TRXs UMTS: 4 carriers LTE: l 900 MHz: 1 carrie r, the band width is 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, or 20 MHz. l 1800 MHz:

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

GSM: l 850 MHz: -113 l 900 MHz PGSM: -113.5 l 900 MHz EGSM: -113.3 l 1800 MHz: -113.8 UMTS: l 850 MHz: -125

GSM: l 850 MHz: -115.8 l 900 MHz PGSM: -116.3 l 900 MHz EGSM: -116.1 l 1800 MHz: -116.6 UMTS: l 850 MHz: -127.8

GSM: l 850 MHz: -118.5 (theoreti cal value) l 900 MHz PGSM: -119 (theoreti cal value) l 900 MHz EGSM: -118.8 (theoreti cal value)


Output Power

Power Consu mption

Output Power of an MRFU V1 (900 MHz/ 1800 MHz/ 1900 MHz, singlemode)

Power consum ption (configu red with MRFU V1, 900 MHz)

l Outp ut Powe r of an MRF U V2 (850 MHz/ 900 MHz/ 1800 MHz, single mode ) l Outp ut Powe r of

l Powe r cons umpt ion (conf igure d with MRF U V2, 900 MHz ) l Powe r cons umpt ion (conf igure

129


Ty pe

MR FU

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)



Capacit y

1 carrie r, the band width is 5, 10, 15, or




l 900 MHz PGSM: -125.5 l 900 MHz EGSM: -125.3 LTE: l 900 MHz PGSM: -106.3 l 900 MHz EGSM: -106.1

l 900 MHz PGSM: -128.3 l 900 MHz EGSM: -128.1 LTE: l 900 MHz PGSM: -109.1 l 900 MHz EGSM: -108.9

l 1800 MHz: -119.3 (theoreti cal value) UMTS: l 850 MHz: -130.5 l 900 MHz PGSM: -131 l 900 MHz EGSM: -130.8 LTE: l 900 MHz PGSM: -111.8 l 900 MHz EGSM: -111.6


Output Power

an MRF U V2 (850 MHz/ 900 MHz, GU MSR ) l Outp ut Powe r of an MRF U V2 (900 MHz/ 1800 MHz, GL

Power Consu mption

d with MRF U V2, 1800

130


Ty pe


V2 a


Capacit y

20 MHz.




l 1800 MHz: -106.6

l 1800 MHz: -109.4

l 1800 MHz: -112.1

Output Power

Power Consu mption

MSR )

MHz )

NOTE

l * indicates that the UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware. l Power sharing assumes a random distribution of UEs in the cell. l The output power is 1 dB lesser than the standard power when the MRFU is located at a height of 3500 m to 4500m; and is 2 dB lesser than the standard power when the MRFU is located at a height of 4500 m to 6000m. l For the MRFU working in GSM mode, the maximum output power of each carrier on the MRFU is 60 W when the S1 configuration is applied. Note that, if the output power of 60 W is required, the related license must be obtained. l For the MRFU V2 working in GSM mode and operating in the 900 MHz frequency band: after design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the MRFU V2 when the S1, S2, or S3 configuration is used. When the S4, S5, or S6 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the MRFU V2. l For the MRFU V2 working in GSM mode and operating in the 1800 MHz frequency band, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained when the S4, S5, or S6 configuration is used. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the MRFU V2. l Factors such as the site-to-site distance, frequency-reuse factor, power control algorithm, and traffic model affect the gain achieved by dynamic power allocation. Therefore, in most cases, the network planning can be based on the power specification achieved by dynamic power allocation. l Before activating the dynamic power sharing feature, enable the DTX and power control functions. In GBSS8.1, the dynamic power sharing feature is mutually exclusive with the GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell, GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing, and GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) features. In GBSS9.0 and later versions, the dynamic power sharing feature can be used together with these features. However, the dynamic power sharing feature currently cannot be used together with the GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001 Extended Cell features in GBSS8.1, GBSS9.0, and later versions.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


131



Table 13-59 Output Power of an MRFU V1 (900 MHz/1800 MHz/1900 MHz, single-mode) Mode

GSM

UMTS

Numbe r of GSM Carrier s

Numbe r of UMTS Carriers

Output Power per GSM Carrier (W)

Output Sharing Power per GSM Carrier (W)

Output Power per UMTS Carrier (W)

1

0

60

60

0

2

0

40

40

0

3

0

27

31

0

4

0

20

27

0

5

0

12

20

0

6

0

10

16

0

0

1

0

0

60

0

2

0

0

40

0

3*

0

0

27*

0

4*

0

0

20*

NOTE

Two MRFU V2 modules are required to enable MIMO on the UMTS side.

Table 13-60 Output Power of an MRFU V2 (850 MHz/900 MHz/1800 MHz, single-mode) Mode

GSM

UMTS

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Nu mbe r of GS M Carr iers

Num ber of UM TS Carri ers

Number of LTE Carriers




Output Power per LTE Carrier (W)

1

0

0

60

60

0

0

2

0

0

40

40

0

0

3

0

0

27

31

0

0

4

0

0

20

27

0

0

5

0

0

16

20

0

0

6

0

0

12

20

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

60

0


132


Mode

LTE









0

1 (MI MO)

0

0

0

2 x 60

0

0

2

0

0

0

40

0

0

2 (MI MO)

0

0

0

2 x 40

0

0

3*

0

0

0

27*

0

0

3 (MI MO) *

0

0

0

2 x 27*

0

0

4*

0

0

0

20*

0

0

4 (MI MO) *

0

0

0

2 x 20*

0

0

0

1 (1T2R)

0

0

0

60

Table 13-61 Output Power of an MRFU V2 (850 MHz/900 MHz, GU MSR)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Mode

Number of GSM Carriers

Number of UMTS Carriers



GSM + UMTS

1

1

40

40

2

1

20

40

2

1

31

20

3

1

20

20

4

1

12

20

5

1

10

20

1

2

40

20

2

2

20

20


133


Mode






3

2

16

10

3

2

10

20

4

2

10

10

NOTE

l When there are no more than three GSM carriers, LTE bandwidth can be 1.4, 3, 5, 10, or 15 MHz in the 900 MHz frequency band or be 5, 10, or 15 MHz in the 1800 MHz frequency band. When there are more than three GSM carriers, LTE bandwidth can be 1.4, 3, 5, or 10 MHz in the 900 MHz frequency band or be 5 or 10 MHz in the 1800 MHz frequency band. l Two MRFU V2 modules are required to enable MIMO on the LTE side.

Table 13-62 Output Power of an MRFU V2 (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GL MSR) Mode





GSM + LTE

1

1

40

30

1

1

30

40

2

1

27

20

2

1

20

30

3

1

20

20

4

1

12

20

5

1

10

20

NOTE

l The typical power consumption and the maximum power consumption are measured when the base station works at a temperature of 25°C. l The typical power consumption for GSM is reached when the base station works with 30% load and power control and DTX are enabled. The maximum power consumption for GSM is reached when the base station works with 100% load. The power consumption for GSM is calculated based on the sharing power. l The typical power consumption for UMTS is reached when the base station works with 40% load. The maximum power consumption for UMTS is reached when the base station works with 100% load. l LTE typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 50% and LTE maximum power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 100%. l LTE power consumption is calculated based on the 2x2 MIMO configuration. Two MRFUs are configured in each sector.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


134



Table 13-63 Power consumption (MRFU V1 operating in the 900 MHz frequency band configured) Cabinet

Mode

GSM

UMTS

BTS3900 (Ver.B) (-48 V)

GSM + UMTS

GSM

UMTS BTS3900 A (Ver.B) (AC)

GSM + UMTS

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Configu ration

Output Power of Each Carrier (W)

Typical Power Consumptio n (W)


S2/2/2

20

700

900

S4/4/4

27

950

1350

S6/6/6

16

840

1180

3x1

20

540

670

3x2

20

800

1020

3x3

20

1040

1330

3x4

20

1150

1450

GSM S2/2/2 + UMTS 3 x1

l GSM: 20

1150

1440


l GSM: 15

970

1260


l GSM: 10

930

1190

S2/2/2

20

800

1040

S4/4/4

27

1070

1540

S6/6/6

16

950

1340

3x1

20

660

840

3x2

20

950

1220

3x3

20

1210

1560

3x4

20

1340

1700


l GSM: 20

1340

1690

l UMTS: 40

l UMTS: 10

l UMTS: 10

l UMTS: 40


135


Cabinet


Mode

GSM

UMTS

BTS3900L (Ver.B) (-48 V)

GSM + UMTS

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Configu ration





l GSM: 15

1140

1490


l GSM: 10

1100

1410

S2/2/2

20

745

960

S4/4/4

27

995

1410

S6/6/6

16

885

1240

3x1

20

585

730

3x2

20

845

1080

3x3

20

1085

1390

3x4

20

1195

1510


l GSM: 20

1195

1500


l GSM: 15

1015

1320


l GSM: 10

975

1250

l UMTS: 10

l UMTS: 10

l UMTS: 40

l UMTS: 10

l UMTS: 10


136




Mode

GSM BTS3900 (Ver.B) (-48 V)

UMTS LTE

GSM BTS3900 A (Ver.B) (AC)

UMTS LTE

GSM BTS3900L (Ver.B) (-48 V)

UMTS LTE

Config uration




S2/2/2

20

620

730

S4/4/4

20

810

1130

S6/6/6

12

710

1025

3x1

20

595

650

3x2

20

630

800

3x1

2 x 60

1185

1270

S2/2/2

20

620

730

S4/4/4

20

810

1130

S6/6/6

12

710

1025

3x1

20

595

650

3x2

20

630

800

3x1

2 x 60

1185

1270

S2/2/2

20

645

755

S4/4/4

20

835

1155

S6/6/6

12

735

1050

3x1

20

620

675

3x2

20

655

825

3x1

2 x 60

1210

1295


BTS3900 (Ver.B) (-48 V)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Mode

GSM

Configu ration




S2/2/2

20

640

750

S4/4/4

20

820

1140

S6/6/6

12

685

1100


137


Cabinet

BTS3900 A (Ver.B) (AC)


Mode

Configu ration




LTE

3x1

2 x 60

1230

1355

S2/2/2

20

640

750

S4/4/4

20

820

1140

S6/6/6

12

685

1100

3x1

2 x 60

1230

1355

S2/2/2

20

645

755

S4/4/4

20

835

1155

S6/6/6

12

735

1050

3x1

2 x 60

1210

1295

GSM

LTE

BTS3900L (Ver.B) (-48 V)

GSM

LTE

Engineering Specifications Table 13-66 shows equipment specifications of an MRFU. Table 13-66 Equipment specifications of an MRFU Type


Weight (kg)

MRFU V1, MRFU V2, and MRFU V2a


≤12

Table 13-67 shows the surge protection specifications for the ports on an MRFU. NOTE


Table 13-67 Surge protection specifications for the ports on an MRFU

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Port

Usage Scenario


Specification

DC port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)


138


Port

Antenna port


Usage Scenario


Specification

Surge current

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA


Surge current

CPRI port


Surge



Surge current

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Antenna Capabilities Table 13-68 shows antenna capabilities for an MRFU. Table 13-68 Antenna capabilities for an MRFU Type

TMA Capabilites


MRFU V1

Supported

Supports AISG2.0

MRFU V2 and MRFU V2a

Supported

Supports AISG2.0

NOTE


13.1.9 Technical Specifications for MRFUd Adopting the software-defined radio (SDR) technology, MRFUd modules can work in different modes with different configurations.

Supported Modes and Frequency Bands Table 13-69 shows the modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFUd.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


139



Table 13-69 Modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFUd Type




Mode

MRFUd

900

890 to 915

935 to 960

880 to 915

925 to 960

1710 to 1785

1805 to 1880


1800

RF Specifications Table 13-70 shows RF specifications for an MRFUd. NOTE

l The GSM receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 51.021, over the central band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 13 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 2%. The central band is the 80% of the full band. l The UMTS receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, over the full band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the BER does not exceed 0.001. l The LTE receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, under a 5 MHz channel bandwidth 5 MHz channel bandwidth based on the FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R = 1/3, 25 RBs) standard. l MRFUd modules operating in GSM mode and in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band comply with the standard EN 301 502 V9.2.1. l MRFUd modules operating in UMTS, LTE, or Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) mode and in 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band comply with the standard ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104. l AB Non-MSR indicates that A data is carried on one transmit channel of an RF module while B data is carried on the other transmit channel of the RF module. AB MSR indicates that A and B data is carried on the same transmit channel of an RF module.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


140



Table 13-70 RF specifications for an MRFUd Ty pe


Capacit y


2-Way Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm)


MR FU d

2T 2R

GSM: 8 TRXs

GSM:

GSM:

GSM:

l 900 MHz: -113.7

l 900 MHz: -116.5

l 1800 MHz: -114

l 1800 MHz: -116.8

l 900 MHz: -119.2 (theoretic al value)

UMTS:

UMTS:

l 900 MHz: -125.8

l 900 MHz: -128.6

l 1800 MHz: -126.1

l 1800 MHz: -128.9

LTE:

LTE:

l 900 MHz: -106.3

l 900 MHz: -109.1

l 1800 MHz: -106.6

l 1800 MHz: -109.4

UMTS: l NonMIM O: 6 carrie rs l MIM O: 4 carrie rs LTE: 2 carriers, the bandwidt h is 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, or 20 MHz.

l 1800 MHz: -119.5 (theoretic al value) UMTS: l 900 MHz: -131.3 l 1800 MHz: -131.6 LTE: l 900 MHz: -111.8 l 1800 MHz: -112.1

Output Power

Power Consum ption

l Outp ut Powe r of an MRF Ud (900 MHz /1800 MHz , singl emode )

l Powe r consu mptio n (confi gured with MRF Ud, 900 MHz)

l Outp ut Powe r of an MRF Ud (900 MHz /1800 MHz , GU NonMSR )

l Powe r consu mptio n (confi gured with MRF Ud, 1800 MHz)

l Outp ut

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


141


Ty pe



Capacit y


2-Way Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm)


Output Power

Power Consum ption

Powe r of an MRF Ud (900 MHz /1800 MHz , GU MSR ) l Outp ut Powe r of an MRF Ud (900 MHz /1800 MHz , GL MSR )

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


142



NOTE

l Power sharing assumes a random distribution of UEs in the cell. l The output power is 1 dB lesser than the standard power when the MRFUd is located at a height of 3500 m to 4500m; and is 2 dB lesser than the standard power when the MRFUd is located at a height of 4500 m to 6000m. l For the MRFUd working in GSM mode: when the S1 or S2 configuration is applied, the maximum output power of each carrier on the MRFUd is 80 W. If the output power of 60 W or 80 W is required, the related license must be obtained. After design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the MRFUd when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used. When the S7 or S8 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the MRFUd. l Factors such as the site-to-site distance, frequency-reuse factor, power control algorithm, and traffic model affect the gain achieved by dynamic power allocation. Therefore, in most cases, the network planning can be based on the power specification achieved by dynamic power allocation. l Before activating the dynamic power sharing feature, enable the DTX and power control functions. In GBSS8.1, the dynamic power sharing feature is mutually exclusive with the GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell, GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing, and GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) features. In GBSS9.0 and later versions, the dynamic power sharing feature can be used together with these features. However, the dynamic power sharing feature currently cannot be used together with the GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001 Extended Cell features in GBSS8.1, GBSS9.0, and later versions.

Table 13-71 Output Power of an MRFUd (900 MHz/1800 MHz, single-mode) Mod e

Num ber of GSM Carri ers







GSM

1

0

0

80

80

0

0

2

0

0

80

80

0

0

3

0

0

40

40

0

0

4

0

0

40

40

0

0

5

0

0

27

30

0

0

6

0

0

27

30

0

0

7

0

0

20

27

0

0

8

0

0

20

27

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

80

0

0

2

0

0

0

80

0

0

3

0

0

0

40

0

0

4

0

0

0

40

0

UMT S

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


143


Mod e

LTE









0

5

0

0

0

25

0

0

6

0

0

0

25

0

0

1 (MIMO)

0

0

0

2 x 40

0

0

2 (MIMO)

0

0

0

2 x 40

0

0

3 (MIMO)

0

0

0

2 x 25

0

0

4 (MIMO)

0

0

0

2 x 20

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

5/10/15/ 20 MHz: 2 x 60 1.4/3 MHz: 2 x 40

0

0

2

0

0

0

2 x 40

Table 13-72 Output Power of an MRFUd (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GU Non-MSR)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Mode





GSM + UMTS

1

1

80

80

2

1

40

80

3

1

27

80

4

1

20

80

5

1

16

80

6

1

12

80

1

2

80

40

2

2

40

40

3

2

27

40

4

2

20

40

5

2

16

40


144


Mode






6

2

12

40

1

3

80

25

2

3

40

25

3

3

27

25

4

3

20

25

5

3

16

25

1

4

80

20

2

4

40

20

3

4

27

20

4

4

20

20

Table 13-73 Output Power of an MRFUd (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GU MSR)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Mode





GSM + UMTS

2

1

40

40

3

1

40

40

4

1

27

40

5

1

27

20

5

1

25

30

5

1

20

40

6

1

20

40

7

1

20

20

7

1

16

30

1

2

40

40

2

2

40

40

3

2

30

20

3

2

25

30

3

2

20

40


145


Mode






4

2

30

20

4

2

25

30

4

2

20

40

5

2

20

20

6

2

20

20

1

1 (MIMO)

40

2 x 40

2

1 (MIMO)

40

2 x 40

3

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 40

3

1 (MIMO)

25

2 x 30

4

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 40

4

1 (MIMO)

25

2 x 30

4

1 (MIMO)

30

2 x 20

1

2 (MIMO)

20

2 x 30

1

2 (MIMO)

40

2 x 20

2

2 (MIMO)

20

2 x 30

2

2 (MIMO)

40

2 x 20

3

2 (MIMO)

15

2 x 20

4

2 (MIMO)

15

2 x 20

Table 13-74 Output Power of an MRFUd (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GL MSR)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Mode





GSM + LTE

1

1 (MIMO)

40

2 x 40

2

1 (MIMO)

40

2 x 40

3

1 (MIMO)

30

2 x 20

3

1 (MIMO)

25

2 x 30

3

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 40

4

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 40


146



Mode





4

1 (MIMO)

25

2 x 30

4

1 (MIMO)

30

2 x 20

5

1 (MIMO)

16

2 x 30

5

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

6

1 (MIMO)

15

2 x 20

NOTE

l The typical power consumption and the maximum power consumption are measured when the base station works at a temperature of 25°C. l The typical power consumption for GSM is reached when the base station works with 30% load and power control and DTX are enabled. The maximum power consumption for GSM is reached when the base station works with 100% load. The power consumption for GSM is calculated based on the sharing power. l The typical power consumption for UMTS is reached when the base station works with 40% load. The maximum power consumption for UMTS is reached when the base station works with 100% load. l LTE typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 50% and LTE maximum power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 100%. l LTE power consumption is calculated based on the 2x2 MIMO configuration. The LTE bandwidth is 10 MHz.

Table 13-75 Power consumption (MRFUd operating in the 900 MHz frequency band configured) Cabin et

Mode

GSM

BTS39 00 (Ver.C) (-48 V)

UMTS LTE GSM + UMTS

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Configuration


Typical Power Consumpt ion (W)

Maximum Power Consumpt ion (W)

S2/2/2

20

620

715

S4/4/4

20

720

1040

S6/6/6

20

1000

1505

S8/8/8

20

1095

1825

3x1

20

510

570

3x2

20

585

750

3 x 10 MHz

40

945

1245

GSM S2/2/2 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

785

965

l UMTS: 20


147


Cabin et


Mode

Configuration




GSM S3/3/3 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

835

1160

GSM S4/4/4 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

1065

1425

GSM S2/2/2 + LTE 3 x 10 MHz

l GSM: 20

1260

1635

GSM S3/3/3 + LTE GSM + LTE 3 x 10 MHz

l GSM: 20

1320

1815


l GSM: 20

1380

1995

S2/2/2

20

650

755

S4/4/4

20

800

1145

S6/6/6

20

1025

1610

S8/8/8

20

1130

1910

3x1

20

540

600

3x2

20

615

780

3 x 10 MHz

40

975

1275

GSM S2/2/2 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

850

1045

GSM S3/3/3 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

895

1195

GSM S4/4/4 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

1075

1480


l GSM: 20

1290

1665


l GSM: 20

1350

1845

GSM

UMTS LTE BTS39 00L (Ver.C) (-48 V)

GSM + UMTS

GSM + LTE

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40


148


Cabin et


Mode

Configuration





l GSM: 20

1410

2025

S2/2/2

20

650

755

S4/4/4

20

800

1145

S6/6/6

20

1025

1610

S8/8/8

20

1130

1910

3x1

20

540

600

3x2

20

615

780

3 x 10 MHz

40

975

1275

GSM S2/2/2 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

850

1045

GSM S3/3/3 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

895

1195

GSM S4/4/4 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

1075

1480


l GSM: 20

1290

1665

GSM S3/3/3 + LTE GSM + LTE 3 x 10 MHz

l GSM: 20

1350

1845


l GSM: 20

1410

2025

GSM

UMTS LTE

BTS39 00A (Ver.C) (-48 V)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

GSM + UMTS

l LTE: 40

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40


149



Table 13-76 Power consumption (MRFUd operating in the 1800 MHz frequency band configured) Cabin et

Mode

GSM

UMTS LTE

BTS39 00 (Ver.C) (-48 V)

GSM + UMTS

GSM + LTE

GSM BTS39 00L (Ver.C) (-48 V) UMTS LTE

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Configuration


Typical Power Consumpti on (W)


S2/2/2

20

635

730

S4/4/4

20

735

1060

S6/6/6

20

1030

1540

S8/8/8

20

1130

1860

3x1

20

510

585

3x2

20

600

795

3 x 10 MHz

40

960

1275

GSM S2/2/2 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

800

985

GSM S3/3/3 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

850

1180

GSM S4/4/4 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

1090

1455


l GSM: 20

1365

1755


l GSM: 20

1410

1920


l GSM: 20

1425

2070

S2/2/2

20

650

770

S4/4/4

20

800

1160

S6/6/6

20

1115

1640

S8/8/8

20

1145

1985

3x1

20

540

615

3x2

20

630

825

3 x 10 MHz

40

990

1305

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40


150


Cabin et


Mode

GSM + UMTS

GSM + LTE

GSM

UMTS LTE BTS39 00A (Ver.C) (-48 V) GSM + UMTS

GSM + LTE

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Configuration




GSM S2/2/2 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

865

1060

GSM S3/3/3 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

910

1225

GSM S4/4/4 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

1075

1480


l GSM: 20

1395

1785


l GSM: 20

1440

1950


l GSM: 20

1455

2100

S2/2/2

20

650

770

S4/4/4

20

800

1160

S6/6/6

20

1115

1640

S8/8/8

20

1145

1985

3x1

20

540

615

3x2

20

630

825

3 x 10MHz

40

990

1305

GSM S2/2/2 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

865

1060

GSM S3/3/3 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

910

1225

GSM S4/4/4 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

1075

1480


l GSM: 20

1395

1785

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l LTE: 40


151


Cabin et


Mode

Configuration





l GSM: 20

1440

1950


l GSM: 20

1455

2100

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40

Engineering Specifications Table 13-77 shows equipment specifications of an MRFUd. Table 13-77 Equipment specifications of an MRFUd Type


Weight (kg)

MRFUd


≤12

Table 13-78 shows the surge protection specifications for the ports on an MRFUd. NOTE


Table 13-78 Surge protection specifications for the ports on an MRFUd Port

Usage Scenario


Specification

DC port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Surge current

Antenna port

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


Surge current


152


Port


Usage Scenario

Surge Protection Mode Common mode

CPRI port


Surge



Surge current

Specification 40 kA 250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Antenna Capabilities Table 13-79 shows antenna capabilities for an MRFUd. Table 13-79 Antenna capabilities for an MRFUd Type

TMA Capabilites


MRFUd

Supported

Supports AISG2.0

NOTE


13.1.10 Technical Specifications for MRFUe Adopting the software-defined radio (SDR) technology, MRFUe modules can work in different modes with different configurations.

Supported Modes and Frequency Bands Table 13-80 shows the modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFUe. Table 13-80 Modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFUe

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Type




Mode

MRFUe

900

880 to 915

925 to 960

1800

1710 to 1785

1805 to 1880

GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, and GL


153



RF Specifications Table 13-81 shows RF specifications for an MRFUe. NOTE

l The GSM receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 51.021, over the central band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 13 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 2%. The central band is the 80% of the full band. l The UMTS receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, over the full band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the BER does not exceed 0.001. l The LTE receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, under a 5 MHz channel bandwidth 5 MHz channel bandwidth based on the FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R = 1/3, 25 RBs) standard. l The MRFUe that works in GSM mode and operates in the 1800 MHz frequency band complies with the EN 301 502 V9.2.1 standard. The MRFUe that works in UMTS, LTE, or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and operates in the 1800 MHz frequency band complies with the ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104 standards. l AB MSR indicates that A and B data is carried on the same transmit channel of an RF module.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


154



Table 13-81 RF specifications for an MRFUe Ty pe


Capacit y




MR FU e

1T 2R

GSM: 8 TRXs

GSM:

GSM:

GSM:

l 900 MHz: -113.7

l 900 MHz: -116.5

l 1800 MHz: -114

l 1800 MHz: -116.8

l 900 MHz: -119.2 (theoreti cal value)

UMTS:

UMTS:

l 900 MHz: -125.8

l 900 MHz: -128.6

l 1800 MHz: -126.1

l 1800 MHz: -128.9

LTE:

LTE:

l 900 MHz: -106.3

l 900 MHz: -109.1

l 1800 MHz: -106.6

l 1800 MHz: -109.4

UMTS: 4 carriers LTE: 2 carriers, 1.4/3/5/1 0/15/20 MHz bandwidt h

l 1800 MHz: -119.5 (theoreti cal value) UMTS: l 900 MHz: -131.3 l 1800 MHz: -131.6 LTE: l 900 MHz: -111.8 l 1800 MHz: -112.1

Output Power

Power Consum ption

l Outp ut Powe r of an MRF Ue (900 MHz/ 1800 MHz, single mode )

Power consump tion (configu red with MRFUe, 1800 MHz)

l Outp ut Powe r of an MRF Ue (900 MHz/ 1800 MHz, GU MSR ) l Outp ut Powe r of

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


155


Ty pe



Capacit y




Output Power

Power Consum ption

an MRF Ue (900 MHz/ 1800 MHz, GL MSR )

NOTE

l Power sharing assumes a random distribution of UEs in the cell. l The output power is 1 dB lesser than the standard power when the MRFUe is located at a height of 3500 m to 4500m; and is 2 dB lesser than the standard power when the MRFUe is located at a height of 4500 m to 6000m. l For the MRFUe working in GSM mode: when the S1 configuration is applied, the maximum output power of each carrier on the MRFUe is 80 W; when the S2 configuration is applied, the maximum output power of each carrier on the MRFUe is 60 W. If the output power of 60 W or 80 W is required, the related license must be obtained. After design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the MRFUe when the S1, S2, or S3 configuration is used. When any of the S4 through S8 configurations is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the MRFUe. l Factors such as the site-to-site distance, frequency-reuse factor, power control algorithm, and traffic model affect the gain achieved by dynamic power allocation. Therefore, in most cases, the network planning can be based on the power specification achieved by dynamic power allocation. l Before activating the dynamic power sharing feature, enable the DTX and power control functions. In GBSS8.1, the dynamic power sharing feature is mutually exclusive with the GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell, GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing, and GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) features. In GBSS9.0 and later versions, the dynamic power sharing feature can be used together with these features. However, the dynamic power sharing feature currently cannot be used together with the GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001 Extended Cell features in GBSS8.1, GBSS9.0, and later versions.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


156



Table 13-82 Output Power of an MRFUe (900 MHz/1800 MHz, single-mode) Mod e








GSM

1

0

0

80

80

0

0

2

0

0

60

60

0

0

3

0

0

40

50

0

0

4

0

0

30

40

0

0

5

0

0

25

30

0

0

6

0

0

20

30

0

0

7

0

0

15

20

0

0

8

0

0

10

16

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

80

0

0

2

0

0

0

60

0

0

3

0

0

0

40

0

0

4

0

0

0

30

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

5/10/15/ 20 MHz: 1 x 60

UMT S

LTE

1.4/3 MHz: 1 x 40 0

0

2

0

0

0

5/10/15/ 20 MHz: 1 x 60 1.4/3 MHz: 1 x 40

Table 13-83 Output Power of an MRFUe (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GU MSR)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Mode





GSM + UMTS

2

1

40

40


157


Mode






3

1

25

30

4

1

24

20

4

1

20

30

5

1

18

20

5

1

16

30

6

1

13

20

7

1

10

20

1

2

40

40

2

2

20

30

3

2

20

20

3

2

15

30

4

2

18

20

5

2

12

20

Table 13-84 Output Power of an MRFUe (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GL MSR) Mode





GSM + LTE

1

1 (MIMO)

60

5/10/15/20 MHz: 60 1.4/3 MHz: 40

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

2

1 (MIMO)

40

40

3

1 (MIMO)

25

30

3

1 (MIMO)

20

40

4

1 (MIMO)

24

20

4

1 (MIMO)

20

30

5

1 (MIMO)

20

20

5

1 (MIMO)

16

30

6

1 (MIMO)

13

20

7

1 (MIMO)

10

20


158



NOTE

l The typical power consumption and the maximum power consumption are measured when the base station works at a temperature of 25°C. l The typical power consumption for GSM is reached when the base station works with 30% load and power control and DTX are enabled. The maximum power consumption for GSM is reached when the base station works with 100% load.

Table 13-85 Power consumption (configured with MRFUe, 1800 MHz) Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.C) (-48V)

BTS3900L (Ver.C) (-48V)

BTS3900A (Ver.C) (-48V)

Mode

GSM

GSM

GSM

Configurat ion


Typical Power Consump tion (W)


S9/9/9

20

1715

2750

S10/10/10

20

1880

3035

S11/11/11

20

2000

3230

S12/12/12

20

2120

3425

S9/9/9

20

1745

2780

S10/10/10

20

1910

3065

S11/11/11

20

2030

3260

S12/12/12

20

2150

3455

S9/9/9

20

1745

2780

S10/10/10

20

1910

3065

S11/11/11

20

2030

3260

S12/12/12

20

2150

3455

Engineering Specifications Table 13-86 shows equipment specifications of an MRFUe. Table 13-86 Equipment specifications of an MRFUe Type


Weight (kg)

MRFUe


≤12

Table 13-87 shows the surge protection specifications for the ports on an MRFUe.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


159



NOTE


Table 13-87 Surge protection specifications for the ports on an MRFUe Port

Usage Scenario


Specification

DC port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

Antenna port


Surge current

CPRI port


Surge



Surge current

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Antenna Capabilities Table 13-88 shows antenna capabilities for an MRFUe. Table 13-88 Antenna capabilities for an MRFUe Type

TMA Capabilites


MRFUe

Supported

Supports AISG2.0

NOTE


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


160



13.2 Technical Specifications for RRUs This section provides technical specifications for RRUs, including supported modes, frequency bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capabilities.

13.2.1 RRU3004 Technical Specifications The RRU3004 is a Remote Radio Unit (RRU) based on the dual density technology. It supports distributed or tower-mounting installation, and is usually used in scenarios requiring medium or small capacity. The RRU3004 supports AC and DC power inputs and performs modulation, demodulation, data processing, and combining and dividing for baseband and RF signals.

Modes and Frequency Bands Supported by an RRU3004 Table 13-89 shows the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3004. Table 13-89 Modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3004 Type

Mode




RRU3004

GSM

900 EGSM

880 to 915

925 to 960

900 PGSM

890 to 915

935 to 960

1800

1710 to 1785

1805 to 1880

RF Specifications Table 13-90 shows RF specifications for an RRU3004.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


161



Table 13-90 RF specifications for an RRU3004 Type

RRU30 04


Capaci ty

2T2R

2 carriers



-113

-115.8

Output Power

Power Consum ption

RRU3004 (900 MHz) output power

Power consump tion (RRU30 04 operatin g in 900 MHz configur ed)

RRU3004 (1800 MHz) output power

Power consump tion (RRU30 04 operatin g in 1800 MHz configur ed)

NOTE

The configuration of S3 and S4 needs two RRU3004 modules.

Table 13-91 RRU3004 (900 MHz) output power

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Carrier Number


1

30 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

2

30 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

3

15 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)

4

15 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)

1 (PBT)

40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)


162



Table 13-92 RRU3004 (1800 MHz) output power Carrier Number


1

20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)

2

20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)

3

10 W (GMSK)/6.6 W (8PSK)

4

10 W (GMSK)/6.6 W (8PSK)

1 (PBT)

30 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

Table 13-93 Power consumption (RRU3004 operating in 900 MHz configured) Cabinet

Configuration



DBS3900

S2/2/2, TOC = 30 W

480

700

Table 13-94 Power consumption (RRU3004 operating in 1800 MHz configured) Cabinet

Configuration



DBS3900

S2/2/2, TOC = 20 W

480

720

NOTE

l

The typical and maximum power consumption in the preceding table refers to the power consumption at the temperature of 25°C.

l

The typical power consumption is reached when the RRU3004 works with 30% load.

l

TOC in the preceding table refers to the cabinet-top power of BTSs with duplex ports.

l

The preceding table uses the power consumption of DBS3900 -48 V DC as an example.

Engineering Specifications Table 13-95 shows equipment specifications for an RRU3004.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


163



Table 13-95 Equipment specifications for an RRU3004 Type

Input Power Specifications

Dimension (H x W Weight (kg) x D)

RRU3004

-48 V DC Voltage range: -36 V DC to -57 V DC

485 mm x 380 mm x 130 mm (with the housing)

17 (with the housing)

Table 13-96 shows environment specifications for an RRU3004. Table 13-96 Environment specifications for an RRU3004 Type

Operating Temperature

Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity

Atmospheric Pressure

RRU3004

-40°C to +50°C (without solar radiation)

5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/ m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa

-40°C to +45°C (with solar radiation)

Table 13-97 shows the standards with which an RRU3004 complies. Table 13-97 Standards with which an RRU3004 complies Type

Operating Environment

Anti-Seismic Performance

Protection Level

RRU3004

Standards

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65

l 3GPP TS 45.005 l ETSI EN 300019-1-4 V2.1.2 (2003-04) Class 4.1: "Nonweatherprotected locations"

Table 13-98 describes the surge protection specifications for RRU3004 ports. NOTE


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


164



Table 13-98 Surge protection specifications for the ports on an RRU3004 Port

Usage Scenario


Specification



Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

5 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

40 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

AC power supply port

Surge

Surge current

Applicable to the scenario where RRU3004 modules are configured remotely or placed outdoors

Surge


Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current

Antenna port

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Applicable to the scenario where RRU3004 modules are installed indoors

Surge current

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


165



Port

Usage Scenario


Specification

AISG RET antenna port


Surge current

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA



Surge current

Differential mode

250 A

Common mode

250 A

I2C port on a local power monitoring device and an alarm port

Applicable to the scenario where batteries under monitoring and RRUs are installed back to back or the scenario where the distance between them is within 1 m.

Surge

250 A

Antenna Capabilities Table 13-99 shows antenna capabilities for an RRU3004. Table 13-99 Antenna capabilities for an RRU3004 Type

TMA Capability


RRU3004

Not supported

Supports AISG1.1

NOTE

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l

An external BT is required if an RRU3004 needs to be configured with a TMA.

l

For RRUs supporting RET antennas, the feed voltage is 12 V and feed current is 2.3 A.


166



13.2.2 Technical Specifications for RRU3008 The RRU3008 is a Remote Radio Unit (RRU) based on the multi-carrier technology. It is usually used in scenarios requiring large capacity. The RRU3008 supports AC and DC power inputs and performs modulation, demodulation, data processing, and combining and dividing for baseband and RF signals.

Modes and Frequency Bands Supported by an RRU3008 Table 13-100 shows the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3008. Table 13-100 Modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3008 Type

Mode




RRU3008 V1

GSM

850

824 to 849

869 to 894

1800

1710 to 1755

1805 to 1850

1740 to 1785

1835 to 1880

1850 to 1890

1930 to 1970

1870 to 1910

1950 to 1990

900 EGSM

880 to 915

925 to 960

900 PGSM

890 to 915

935 to 960

900 CMCC

885 to 910

930 to 955

1900

RRU3008 V2

GSM


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


167



Table 13-101 RF specifications for an RRU3008 Type

RRU30 08 V1

Trans mit and Receiv e Chann els

Capaci ty

2T2R

8 carriers



-113

-115.8

Output Power

Power Consum ption

RRU3008 V1 (850/1800/190 0 MHz) output power

Power consump tion (RRU30 08 V1 operatin g in 900/1800 MHz configur ed) Power consump tion (RRU30 08 V1 operatin g in 850/1900 MHz configur ed)

RRU30 08 V2

l 900 EGSM: -113.3

l 900 EGSM: -116.1

l 900 PGSM/ 900 CMCC: -113.5

l 900 PGSM/ 900 CMCC: -116.3

RRU3008 V2 (900 MHz) output power

Power consump tion (RRU30 08 V2 operatin g in 900 MHz configur ed)

Table 13-102 RRU3008 V1 (850/1800/1900 MHz) output power

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Carrier Number



3

20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)

20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)

4

15 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)

20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)


168



Carrier Number



5

12 W (GMSK)/8.0 W (8PSK)

12 W (GMSK)/8.0 W (8PSK)

6

10 W (GMSK)/6.6 W (8PSK)

12 W (GMSK)/8.0 W (8PSK)

7

7.0 W (GMSK)/4.6 W (8PSK)

8.0 W (GMSK)/5.3 W (8PSK)

8

5.5 W (GMSK)/3.6 W (8PSK)

7.0 W (GMSK)/4.6 W (8PSK)

Table 13-103 RRU3008 V2 (900 MHz) output power Carrier Number



3

20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

4

20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

5

13 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)

15 W (GMSK)/15 W (8PSK)

6

13 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)

15 W (GMSK)/15 W (8PSK)

7

10 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)

13 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)

8

10 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)

13 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)

NOTE

l

After design optimization, RRU3008 modules with the configuration of S1 to S6 have the same output power no matter they use the Gaussian minimum shift-frequency keying (GMSK) or 8 phase shift keying (8PSK) modulation scheme.

l

With the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature, RRU3008 modules with the configuration of S7 to S8 can also have the same output power no matter they use the GMSK or 8PSK modulation scheme.

l

RF standard: EN 301 502 V9.2.1.

Table 13-104 Power consumption (RRU3008 V1 operating in 900/1800 MHz configured)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Cabinet

Configuration



DBS3900

S4/4/4, TOC = 20 W

720

1260

S6/6/6, TOC = 12 W

640

1180


169



Table 13-105 Power consumption (RRU3008 V1 operating in 850/1900 MHz configured) Cabinet

Configuration



DBS3900

S4/4/4, TOC = 20 W

700

1220

S6/6/6, TOC = 12 W

620

1130

Table 13-106 Power consumption (RRU3008 V2 operating in 900 MHz configured) Cabinet

Configuration



DBS3900

S4/4/4, TOC = 20 W

640

1130

S6/6/6, TOC = 15 W

630

1270

NOTE

l

TOC refers to the cabinet-top power of BTSs with duplex ports.

l

The typical power consumption is reached when the RRU3008 works with 30% load.

Engineering Specifications Table 13-107 shows equipment specifications for an RRU3008. Table 13-107 Equipment specifications for an RRU3008 Type

Input Power Specifications


Weight (kg)

RRU3008

-48 V DC, voltage range: -36 V DC to -57 V DC



Table 13-108 shows environment specifications for an RRU3008.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


170



Table 13-108 Environment specifications for an RRU3008 Type

Operating temperature

Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU3008 V1

l -40°C to +50°C (without solar radiation)

5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/ m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa

l -40°C to +45°C (with solar radiation) RRU3008 V2

l -40°C to +55°C (without solar radiation) l -40°C to +50°C (with solar radiation)




Protection Level

RRU3008

Standards

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65


Table 13-110 and Table 13-111 describes the surge protection specifications for RRU3008 ports. NOTE


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


171



Table 13-110 Surge protection specifications for the ports on an RRU3008 V1 Port

Usage Scenario


Specification



Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

5 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

40 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current


Surge

Surge current

Applicable to the scenario where RRU3008 modules are configured remotely or placed outdoors

Surge


Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current

Antenna port

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Applicable to the scenario where RRU3008 modules are installed indoors

Surge current

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


172



Port

Usage Scenario


Specification

AISG RET antenna port


Surge current

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA



Surge current

Differential mode

250 A

Common mode

250 A



Surge

250 A

Table 13-111 Surge protection specifications for the ports on an RRU3008 V2 Port

Usage Scenario


Specification



Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surge current


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Applicable to the scenario

Surge


173


Port


Usage Scenario where RRU3008 V2 modules are installed indoors

Surge current

Applicable to the scenario where RRU3008 V2 are configured remotely or placed outdoors

Surge


Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current


Surge current

Antenna port

RET antenna port


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


Surge current

Specification

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

5 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

40 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA 250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


174



Port

Usage Scenario


Specification



Surge

250 A


TMA Capability


RRU3008

Supported

Supports AISG2.0

NOTE


13.2.3 Technical Specifications for RRU3801E An RRU3801E, which is a remote radio unit for UMTS, supports a maximum of two carriers.

Supported Modes and Frequency Bands Table 13-113 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3801E.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


175



Table 13-113 Modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3801E Type

Mode




RRU3801E (DC)

UMTS

2100

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170

1900

1850 to 1910

1930 to 1990

850

824 to 835

869 to 880

2100

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170

RRU3801E (AC)

RF Specifications Table 13-114 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an RRU3801E.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


176



Table 13-114 RRU3801E RF specifications Type

RRU380 1E

RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y


Receive r Sensiti vity with Two Antenn as

Receive r Sensiti vity with Four Antenn as

1T2R

2 carriers

l 2100 MHz: -125. 8

l 2100 MHz: --128 .6

l 2100 MHz: -131. 3

l 1900 MHz: -125. 3

l 1900 MHz: -128. 1

l 1900 MHz: -130. 8

l 850 MHz: -125. 6

l 850 MHz: -128. 4

l 850 MHz: -131. 1

Power

Power Consu mption

RRU380 1E output power

l Powe r cons umpt ion of DBS 3900 with RRU 3801 E (DC) l Powe r cons umpt ion of DBS 3900 with RRU 3801 E (AC) l Powe r cons umpt ion of BTS3 900C with RRU 3801 E (DC)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


177



NOTE

l The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, at the antenna connector over the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 0.001. l The receiver sensitivity on the 850 MHz band is measured on its subbands.

The RRU3801E supports a maximum of two carriers. The maximum output power is 40 W. Table 13-115 RRU3801E output power Number of Carriers


1

40

2

20

NOTE


Table 13-116 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3801E (DC) Configur ation (Carrier x Sector)


Typical Power Consum ption (W)

3x1

20

390

3x2

20

480

Maximu m Power Consum ption (W)


50 Ah

92 Ah

480

2.4

5.7

11.3

650

1.7

4.3

9

Table 13-117 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3801E (AC) Configur ation (Carrier x Sector)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)



3x1

20

390

3x2

20

480



50 Ah

92 Ah

480

2.4

5.7

11.3

650

1.7

4.3

9.0


178



Table 13-118 Power consumption of BTS3900C with RRU3801E (DC) Configur ation (Carrier x Sector)



1x1

20

190

1x2

20

220



50 Ah

92 Ah

240

5.5

12.6

23.2

290

4.5

10.9

20.0

NOTE

l Typical power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 40% load at the 25°C ambient temperature. l Maximum power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 100% load at the 25°C ambient temperature. l One WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.

Engineering Specifications Table 13-119 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3801E. Table 13-119 Equipment specifications of an RRU3801E Type

Input Power


Weight

RRU3801E (DC)

-48 V DC; voltage range: -57 V DC to -36 V DC

l 480 mm x 270 mm x 140 mm (without the housing and connectors)

l 15 kg (without the housing) l 17 kg (with the housing)

l 485 mm x 285 mm x 170 mm (with the housing)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


179



Type

Input Power


Weight

RRU3801E (AC)

l 200 V AC to 240 V AC singlephase; voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V AC


l 20.5 kg (without the housing)

l 100 V AC to 120 V AC or 200 V AC to 240 V AC dual-phase; voltage range: 90 V AC to 135 V AC or 180 V AC to 270 V AC


l 22.5 kg (with the housing)

Table 13-120 lists the environmental specifications of an RRU3801E. Table 13-120 Environmental specifications of an RRU3801E Type


Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU3801E

l -40°C to +50°C (with 1120 W/m2 solar radiation)

5% RH to 100% RH

(1 to 30) g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa


Table 13-121 lists the compliance standards for an RRU3801E. Table 13-121 Compliance standards of an RRU3801E

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Type


Anti-seismic Performance

Protection Rating

RRU3801E (DC)

l 3GPP TS 25.141 l ETSI EN 300019-1-4 V2.1.2 (2003-04) Class 4.1: "Non-

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65


180



Type


RRU3801E (AC)


weatherprotected locations"

Protection Rating IP55

Table 13-122 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3801E. NOTE


Table 13-122 Surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3801E Port

Usage Scenario


Specifications

DC power port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

5 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

40 kA

Surge current

AC power port

Indoor applications

Surge

Surge current

Outdoor applications

Surge

Surge current Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


181


Port

Antenna port


Usage Scenario



Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current



Surge current



Surge

RET antenna port

Specifications

Common mode

40 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA 250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA 250 A

Antenna Capability Table 13-123 lists the antenna capability of an RRU3801E. Table 13-123 Antenna capability of an RRU3801E

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Type

TMA Support

RET Antenna Support

RRU3801E

Supported

AISG1.1


182



NOTE


13.2.4 Technical Specifications for RRU3804 An RRU3804, which is a remote radio unit for UMTS, supports a maximum of four carriers.

Supported Modes and Frequency Bands Table 13-124 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3804. Table 13-124 Modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3804 Type

Mode




RRU3804 (DC)

UMTS

2100

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170

1900

1850 to 1910

1930 to 1990

AWS

1710 to 1755

2110 to 2155

850

824 to 849

869 to 894

835 to 849

880 to 894

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170

RRU3804 (AC)

2100

RF Specifications Table 13-125 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an RRU3804.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


183



Table 13-125 RRU3804 RF specifications Type

RRU380 4

RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y




1T2R

4 carriers

l 2100 MHz or AWS : -125. 8*

l 2100 MHz or AWS : -128. 6*

l 2100 MHz or AWS : -131. 3*

l 1900 MHz : -125. 3*

l 1900 MHz: -128. 1*

l 1900 MHz: -130. 8*

l 850 MHz **: -128. 4*

l 850 MHz **: -131. 1*

l 850 MHz **: -125. 6*

Power

Power Consu mption

RRU380 4 output power

l Powe r cons umpt ion of DBS 3900 with RRU 3804 (DC) l Powe r cons umpt ion of DBS 3900 with RRU 3804 (AC) l Powe r cons umpt ion of BTS3 900C with RRU 3804 (DC)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


184



NOTE

l *The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, at the antenna connector over the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and that the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 0.001. l **The receiver sensitivity on the 850 MHz band is measured on its subbands.

The RRU3804 supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W. Table 13-126 RRU3804 output power Number of Carriers


1

60

2

30

3

20

4

15

NOTE


Table 13-127 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3804 (DC) Configur ation (Carrier x Sector)



3x1

20

390

3x2

20

3x3 3x4



50 Ah

92 Ah

480

2.4

5.7

11.3

480

650

1.7

4.3

9.0

20

630

860

1.2

3.1

6.7

15

630

860

1.2

3.1

6.7

Table 13-128 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3804 (AC) Configur ation (Carrier x Sector)

3x1 Issue 12 (2013-05-27)



20

435


540


50 Ah

92 Ah

2.0

4.9

10.1


185


Configur ation (Carrier x Sector)




3x2

20

555

3x3

20

3x4

15



50 Ah

92 Ah

740

1.4

3.7

7.8

720

980

0.9

2.7

5.6

720

980

0.9

2.7

5.6

NOTE

l Typical power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 40% load at the 25°C ambient temperature. l Maximum power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 100% load at the 25°C ambient temperature. l In 3 x 4 configuration, antenna port output power per carrier is 15 W in the calculation of typical and maximum power consumption values. l In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured. l In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

Table 13-129 Power consumption of BTS3900C with RRU3804 (DC) Configur ation (Carrier x Sector)



1x1

20

190

1x2

20

1x3

20



50 Ah

92 Ah

240

5.5

12.6

23.2

220

290

4.5

10.9

20.0

260

350

3.8

9.0

16.9

NOTE


Engineering Specifications Table 13-130 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3804. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


186



Table 13-130 Equipment specifications of an RRU3804 Type

Input Power


Weight

RRU3804 (DC)




l 485 mm x 285 mm x 170 mm (with the housing) RRU3804 (AC)





l 20.5 kg (without the housing) l 22.5 kg (with the housing)

Table 13-131 lists the environmental specifications of an RRU3804. Table 13-131 Environmental specifications of an RRU3804 Type


Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU3804 (DC)

l -40°C to +50°C (with 1120 W/m2 solar radiation) l -40°C to +55°C (without solar radiation)

5% RH to 100% RH

(1 to 30) g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa

RRU3804 (AC)

Table 13-132 lists the compliance standards for an RRU3804.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


187



Table 13-132 Compliance standards for an RRU3804 Type



Protection Rating

RRU3804 (DC)


NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65

RRU3804 (AC)

IP55

Table 13-133 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3804. NOTE


Table 13-133 Surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3804 Port

Usage Scenario


Specifications

DC power port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

5 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surge current

AC power port

Indoor applications

Surge

Surge current


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Surge


188


Port

Antenna port


Usage Scenario


Specifications

Surge current

Differential mode

40 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA


Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current



Surge current



Surge

RET antenna port

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA 250 A

Antenna Capability Table 13-134 lists the antenna capability of an RRU3804.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


189



Table 13-134 Antenna capability of an RRU3804 Type

TMA Support

RET Antenna Support

RRU3804

Supported

AISG2.0

NOTE


13.2.5 Technical Specifications for RRU3805 An RRU3805, which is a remote radio unit for UMTS, supports a maximum of three carriers.


Mode




RRU3805

UMTS

1800

1749.9 to 1764.9

1844.9 to 1859.9

1900

1850 to 1890

1930 to 1970

1870 to 1910

1950 to 1990

835 to 849

880 to 894

850


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


190




RRU380 5

RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y




2T2R

l 1800 MHz: 3 carrie rs

l 1800 MHz : -125. 3

l 1800 MHz: --128 .1

l 1800 MHz: --130 .8

l 1900 MHz or 850 MHz: 2 carrie rs

l 1900 MHz or 850 MHz : -125. 2

l 1900 MHz or 850 MHz: -128. 0

l 1900 MHz or 850 MHz: -130. 7

Power

Power Consum ption


l DBS3 900 powe r consu mptio n (1800 MHz RRU 3805 witho ut MIM O) l DBS3 900 powe r consu mptio n (1800 MHz RRU 3805 with MIM O) l DBS3 900 powe r consu mptio n (1900 MHz/ 850

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


191


Type


RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y




Power

Power Consum ption

MHz RRU 3805 witho ut MIM O) l DBS3 900 powe r consu mptio n (1900 MHz/ 850 MHz RRU 3805 with MIM O)

NOTE

The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, at the antenna connector over the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 0.001.

The RRU3805 (1800 MHz) supports a maximum of three carriers. The maximum output power is 2 x 60 W. The RRU3805 (1900 MHz or 850 MHz) supports a maximum of two carriers. The maximum output power is 2 x 30 W.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


192



Table 13-137 RRU3805 output power Type

Output Power

RRU3805 (1800 MHz)

The RRU3805(1800 MHz) supports a maximum of three carriers. The output power at its antenna port is 2 x 60 W. l Configurations of single-output, multipleinput multiple-output (MIMO), or combination of the two are supported. l Single-output configuration: The maximum output power of each TX channel is 60 W. l MIMO configuration: The maximum output power is 2 x 60 W. l Combined configuration: The maximum output power of each TX channel is 60 W. The RRU3805(1900 MHz or 850 MHz) supports a maximum of two carriers. The output power at its antenna port is 2 x 30 W.

RRU3805 (1900 MHz or 850 MHz)

l Configurations of single-output, multipleinput multiple-output (MIMO), or combination of the two are supported. l Single-output configuration: The maximum output power of each TX channel is 40 W. l MIMO configuration: The maximum output power is 2 x 30 W. l Combined configuration: The maximum output power of each TX channel is 30 W.

NOTE


Table 13-138 DBS3900 power consumption (1800 MHz RRU3805 without MIMO) Configuration (Carrier x Sector)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)




92 Ah

3x1

540

630

3.3

6

3x2

805

1045

2

3.6

3x3

1000

1300

1.6

2.9


193



Table 13-139 DBS3900 power consumption (1800 MHz RRU3805 with MIMO) Configuration (Carrier x Sector)




92 Ah

3x1

735

975

2.1

3.9

3x2

1045

1405

1.5

2.7

Table 13-140 DBS3900 power consumption (1900 MHz/850 MHz RRU3805 without MIMO) Configuration (Carrier x Sector)




92 Ah

3x1

540

615

3.3

6.1

3x2

835

985

2.1

3.8

Table 13-141 DBS3900 power consumption (1900 MHz/850 MHz RRU3805 with MIMO) Configuration (Carrier x Sector)




92 Ah

3x1

540

615

3.3

6.1

3x2

835

985

2.1

3.8

Engineering Specifications Table 13-142 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3805.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


194




Input Power


Weight

RRU3805

-48 V DC; voltage range: -57 V DC to -36 V DC (1800 MHz)

l 485 mm x 356 mm x 140 mm (without the housing and connectors) l 485 mm x 380 mm x 170 mm (with the housing)


-48 V DC; voltage range: -57 V DC to -38.4 V DC (1900 MHz or 850 MHz)



Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU3805


5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/ m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa


Table 13-144 lists the compliance standards for an RRU3805. Table 13-144 Compliance standards for an RRU3805 Type



Protection Rating

RRU3805

l 3GPP TS 25.141

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65

l ETSI EN 300019-1-4 V2.1.2 (2003-04) Class 4.1: "Nonweatherprotected locations"

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


195



Surge Protection Specifications Table 13-145 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3805. NOTE



Usage Scenario


Specifications

DC power port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

Antenna port


Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current


Surge current

RET antenna port


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


196



Port

Usage Scenario


Specifications



Surge

250 A

Antenna Capability Table 13-146 lists the antenna capability of an RRU3805. Table 13-146 Antenna capability of an RRU3805 Type

TMA Support

RET Antenna Support

RRU3805

Supported

AISG2.0

NOTE




Mode




RRU3806

UMTS

2100

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


197




RRU380 6

RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y




1T2R

4 carriers

-125.8

-128.6

-131.3

Power

Power Consu mption


l Powe r cons umpt ion of DBS 3900 with RRU 3806 (DC) l Powe r cons umpt ion of DBS 3900 with RRU 3806 (AC) l Powe r cons umpt ion of BTS3 900C with RRU 3806 (DC)

NOTE


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


198



The RRU3806 supports a maximum of four carriers. The output power at its antenna port is 80 W. Table 13-149 RRU3806 output power Number of Carriers


1

80

2

40

3

26

4

20

NOTE


Table 13-150 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3806 (DC) Configurat Output ion (Carrier Power per x Sector) Carrier (W)


Maximum Power Consumpti on (W)


92 Ah

3x1

20

400

480

5.5

11

3x2

20

490

650

4.2

8.8

3x3

20

630

860

3.16

6.6

3x4

20

710

1030

2.8

5.7

Table 13-151 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3806 (AC) Configurat Output ion (Carrier Power per x Sector) Carrier (W)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)




92 Ah

3x1

20

435

540

4.9

10.1

3x2

20

555

740

3.7

7.8


199



Configurat Output ion (Carrier Power per x Sector) Carrier (W)




92 Ah

3x3

20

690

950

2.8

5.8

3x4

20

780

1130

2.4

5.0

NOTE


Table 13-152 Power consumption of BTS3900C with RRU3806 (DC) Configurat Output ion (Carrier Power per x Sector) Carrier (W)




92 Ah

1x1

20

190

240

12.6

23.2

1x2

20

220

290

10.9

20.0

1x3

20

260

350

9.0

16.9

NOTE


Engineering Specifications Table 13-153 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3806.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


200




Input Power


Weight

RRU3806 (DC)




l 485 mm x 285 mm x 170 mm (with the housing) RRU3806 (AC)





l 20.5 kg (without the housing) l 22.5 kg (with the housing)



Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU3806 (DC)

l -40°C to +50°C (with 1120 W/m2 solar radiation) l -40°C to +55°C (without solar radiation)

5% RH to 100% RH

(1 to 30) g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa

RRU3806 (AC)


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


201






Protection Rating

RRU3806 (DC)


NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65

RRU3806 (AC)

IP55




Usage Scenario


Specifications

DC power port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

5 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surge current

AC power port

Indoor applications

Surge

Surge current


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Surge


202


Port

Antenna port


Usage Scenario


Specifications

Surge current

Differential mode

40 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA


Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current



Surge current



Surge

RET antenna port

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA 250 A


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


203




TMA Support

RET Antenna Support

RRU3806

Supported

AISG2.0

NOTE




Mode




RRU3808

UMTS LTE

2100

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170

AWS

1710 to 1755

2110 to 2155


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


204




RRU380 8

RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y




2T2R

UMTS: 4 carriers

UMTS: -125.8

UMTS: -128.6

UMTS: -131.3

LTE: 1 carrier. The bandwid th of each carrier can be:

LTE: -106.3

LTE: -109.1

LTE: N/ A

l 1.4 MHz, 3MH z, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20M Hz in the AWS band. l 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20M Hz in the 2100 MHz band.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


Power

Power Consu mption


UMTS: l DBS 3900 powe r cons umpt ion (2100 MHz RRU 3808 with out MIM O) l DBS 3900 powe r cons umpt ion (2100 MHz RRU 3808 with MIM O) l DBS 3900 powe r cons umpt ion (AW S

205


Type


RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y




Power

Power Consu mption

RRU 3808 with out MIM O) l DBS 3900 powe r cons umpt ion (AW S RRU 3808 with MIM O) LTE: 320 W

NOTE

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l

The receiver sensitivity of UMTS is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, at the antenna connector over the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 0.001.

l

The LTE receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, under a 5 MHz channel bandwidth based on the FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R = 1/3, 25 RBs) standard.


206



Table 13-160 RRU3808 output power Type

Mode

Output Power

RRU3808

UMTS

The RRU3808 supports a maximum of four carriers. The output power at its antenna port is 2 x 40 W. l Configurations of singleoutput, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO), or combination of the two are supported. l Single-output configuration: The maximum output power of each TX channel is 40 W. l MIMO configuration: The maximum output power is 2 x 40 W. l Combined configuration: The maximum output power of each TX channel is 40 W. l Uneven power configuration is supported.

LTE

2 x 40 W

NOTE


Table 13-161 DBS3900 power consumption (2100 MHz RRU3808 without MIMO) Configurat Output ion (Carrier Power per x Sector) Carrier (W)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)




92 Ah

3x1

20

410

490

5.2

10.7

3x2

20

510

640

4

8.5

3x3

20

740

950

2.6

5.5


207




3x4

20


800


1060


92 Ah

2.4

4.9

NOTE

l

In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.

l

In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

Table 13-162 DBS3900 power consumption (2100 MHz RRU3808 with MIMO) Configurat Output ion (Carrier Power per x Sector) Carrier (W)




92 Ah

3x1

2 x 10

460

570

4.5

9.4

3x2

2 x 10

580

730

3.6

7.2

3x3

2 x 10

730

950

2.6

5.6

3x4

2 x 10

800

1060

2.4

4.9

NOTE

l

In 3 x 1 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.

l

In 3 x 2 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

l

In 3 x 3 configuration, three WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

l

In 3 x 4 configuration, four WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

Table 13-163 DBS3900 power consumption (AWS RRU3808 without MIMO) Configurat Output ion (Carrier Power per x Sector) Carrier (W)

3x1 Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

20


410


482



92 Ah

5.2

10.8 208







92 Ah

3x2

20

518

632

4

8.4

3x3

20

721

931

2.7

5.6

3x4

20

835

1051

2.3

4.7

NOTE

l

In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.

l

In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

Table 13-164 DBS3900 power consumption (AWS RRU3808 with MIMO) Configurat Output ion (Carrier Power per x Sector) Carrier (W)




92 Ah

3x1

2 x 10

470

572

4.4

9.2

3x2

2 x 10

628

766

3.2

6.7

3x3

2 x 10

774

975

2.5

5.1

3x4

2 x 10

890

1109

2.1

4.3

NOTE

l

In 3 x 1 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.

l

In 3 x 2 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

l

In 3 x 3 configuration, three WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

l

In 3 x 4 configuration, four WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

Equipment Specifications Table 13-165 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3808.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


209




Input Power


Weight

RRU3808







Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU3808


5% RH to 100% RH

(1 to 30) g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa

l -40°C to +50°C (with solar radiation)




Protection Rating

RRU3808

Standards:

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65

l 3GPP TS 25.141 l 3GPP TS 36.141 l ETSI EN 300019-1-4 V2.1.2 (2003-04) Class 4.1: "Nonweatherprotected locations" Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


210






Usage Scenario


Specifications

DC power port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

Antenna port


Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current


Surge current

RET antenna port


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


211



Port

Usage Scenario


Specifications



Surge

250 A


TMA Support

RET Antenna Support

RRU3808

Supported

AISG2.0

NOTE




Mode




RRU3824

UMTS

2100

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


212




RRU382 4

RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y




1T2R

4 carriers

-125.8* (2100 MHz)

-128.6* (2100 MHz)

-131.3* (2100 MHz)

Power

Power Consu mption


l Powe r cons umpt ion of DBS 3900 with RRU 3824 l Powe r cons umpt ion of BTS3 900C with RRU 3824

NOTE

l *The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, at the antenna connector over the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and that the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 0.001.

The RRU3824 supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W. Table 13-172 RRU3824 output power

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Number of Carriers


1

60

2

30

3

20


213



Number of Carriers


4

15

NOTE


Table 13-173 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3824 Configur ation (Carrier x Sector)



3x1

20

390

3x2

20

3x3 3x4



50 Ah

92 Ah

480

2.4

5.7

11.3

480

650

1.7

4.3

9.0

20

630

860

1.2

3.1

6.7

15

630

860

1.2

3.1

6.7

NOTE

l Typical power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 40% load at the 25°C ambient temperature. l Maximum power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 100% load at the 25°C ambient temperature. l In 3 x 4 configuration, antenna port output power per carrier is 15 W in the calculation of typical and maximum power consumption values. l In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured. l In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

Table 13-174 Power consumption of BTS3900C with RRU3824 Configu ration (Carrier x Sector)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)





50 Ah

92 Ah

1x1

20

190

240

5.5

12.6

23.2

1x2

20

220

290

4.5

10.9

20.0

1x3

20

260

350

3.8

9.0

16.9


214



NOTE


Engineering Specifications Table 13-175 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3824. Table 13-175 Equipment specifications of an RRU3824 Type

Input Power


Weight

RRU3824



l 14 kg (without the housing)

NOTE The RRU3824 supports AC applications after being configured with an AC/DC power module. For details, see the AC/DC Power Module User Guide.

l 15 kg (with the housing)




Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU3824


5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/ m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa


Table 13-177 lists the compliance standards for an RRU3824. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


215






Protection Rating

RRU3824

l 3GPP TS 25.141

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65





Usage Scenario


Specifications

DC power port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

5 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surge current

AC power port

Indoor applications

Surge

Surge current


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Surge


216


Port

Antenna port


Usage Scenario


Specifications

Surge current

Differential mode

40 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA


Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current



Surge current



Surge

RET antenna port

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA 250 A


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


217




TMA Support

RET Antenna Support

RRU3824

Supported

AISG2.0

NOTE




Mode




RRU3826

UMTS

2100

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


218




RRU382 6

RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y




1T2R

4 carriers

-125.8

-128.6

-131.3

Power

Power Consu mption


l Powe r cons umpt ion of DBS 3900 with RRU 3826 l Powe r cons umpt ion of BTS3 900C with RRU 3826

NOTE


The RRU3826 supports a maximum of four carriers. The output power at its antenna port is 80 W. Table 13-182 RRU3826 output power

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Number of Carriers


1

80

2

40

3

26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219



Number of Carriers


4

20

NOTE


Table 13-183 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3826 Configurat Output ion (Carrier Power per x Sector) Carrier (W)




92 Ah

3x1

20

400

480

5.5

11

3x2

20

490

650

4.2

8.8

3x3

20

630

860

3.16

6.6

3x4

20

710

1030

2.8

5.7

NOTE


Table 13-184 Power consumption of BTS3900C with RRU3826 Configurat Output ion (Carrier Power per x Sector) Carrier (W)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)




92 Ah

1x1

20

190

240

12.6

23.2

1x2

20

220

290

10.9

20.0

1x3

20

260

350

9.0

16.9


220



NOTE



Input Power


Weight

RRU3826









Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU3826


5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/ m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa




221






Protection Rating

RRU3826

l 3GPP TS 25.141

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65





Usage Scenario


Specifications

DC power port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

5 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surge current

AC power port

Indoor applications

Surge

Surge current


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Surge


222


Port

Antenna port


Usage Scenario


Specifications

Surge current

Differential mode

40 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA


Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current



Surge current



Surge

RET antenna port

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA 250 A


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


223




TMA Support

RET Antenna Support

RRU3826

Supported

AISG2.0

NOTE




Mode




RRU3828

UMTS

2100

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


224




RRU382 8

RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y




2T2R


-126.1

-128.9

-131.6


Power

Power Consu mption

l Outp ut powe r of RRU 3828 with out MIM O

l DBS 3900 powe r cons umpt ion (RR U382 8 with out MIM O)

l Outp ut powe r of RRU 3828 with MIM O l Carr ier comb inati ons supp orted by RRU 3828 in hybri d confi gurat ions

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


l DBS 3900 powe r cons umpt ion (RR U382 8 with MIM O)

225



NOTE


RRU3828s with MIMO and without MIMO support four carriers and six carriers, respectively. The output power at its antenna port is 2 x 40 W. NOTE

l


l


Table 13-192 Output power of RRU3828 without MIMO Number of Related to Amplifier 1

Carriers Power


Carriers Power


1

0

40

2

0

20

3

0

13

4

0

10

1

1

40

2

2

20

3

3

13

Table 13-193 Output power of RRU3828 with MIMO Number of MIMO Carriers


1

2 x 40

2

2 x 40

3

2 x 13

4

2 x 10

Table 13-194 Carrier combinations supported by RRU3828 in hybrid configurations

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)



1

5

2


226





3

2

NOTE

With hybrid configurations, the RRU3828 module supports a maximum of six carriers and each transmit channel supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power of each transmit channel is 40 W. For the output power of a MIMO carrier, see Table 13-193. For the output power of a single-output carrier, see Table 13-192.

Table 13-195 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3828 without MIMO) Configurat Output ion (Carrier Power per x Sector) Carrier (W)




92 Ah

3x1

20

421

493

5.1

10.5

3x2

20

520

658

4

8.3

3x3

20

785

977

2.5

5

3x4

20

854

1109

2.2

4.5

NOTE

l

Typical power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 40% load at the 25°C ambient temperature.

l

Maximum power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 100% load at the 25°C ambient temperature.

l

In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPd2 board and one WMPT board are configured.

l

In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

Table 13-196 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3828 with MIMO) Configurat Output ion (Carrier Power per x Sector) Carrier (W)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)




92 Ah

3x1

2 x 10

535

604

3.9

8.1

3x2

2 x 10

689

824

2.9

5.9


227







92 Ah

3x3

2 x 10

864

1053

2.1

4.4

3x4

2 x 10

1011

1266

1.7

3.8

NOTE

l


l


l

In 3 x 1 configuration, one WBBPd2 board and one WMPT board are configured.

l

In 3 x 2 configuration, two WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

l

In 3 x 3 configuration, three WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

l

In 3 x 4 configuration, four WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured.


Input Power


Weight

RRU3828







Table 13-198 lists the environmental specifications of an RRU3828.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


228



Table 13-198 Environmental specifications of an RRU3828 Type


Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU3828


5% RH to 100% RH

(1 to 30) g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa





Protection Rating

RRU3828

l 3GPP TS 25.141

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65




Table 13-200 Surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3828

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Port

Usage Scenario


Specifications

DC power port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)


229


Port

Antenna port


Usage Scenario


Specifications

Surge current

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA


Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current



Surge current



Surge

RET antenna port

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA 250 A


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


230




TMA Support

RET Antenna Support

RRU3828

Supported

AISG2.0

NOTE




Mode




RRU3829

UMTS

2100

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


231




RRU382 9

RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y




2T2R


-126.1

-128.9

-131.6


Power

Power Consu mption

l Outp ut powe r of RRU 3829 with out MIM O


l Outp ut powe r of RRU 3829 with MIM O l Carr ier comb inati ons supp orted by RRU 3829 in hybri d confi gurat ions

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)



232



NOTE


RRU3829s with MIMO and without MIMO support four carriers and six carriers, respectively. The output power at its antenna port is 2 x 60 W. NOTE

l


l



Carriers Power


Carriers Power


1

0

60

2

0

30

3

0

20

4

0

15

1

1

60

2

2

30

3

3

20



1

40 + 40

2

30 + 30

3

20 + 20

4

15 + 15

Table 13-206 Carrier combinations supported by RRU3829 in hybrid configurations

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)



1

5

2


233





3

2

NOTE

With hybrid configurations, the RRU3829 module supports a maximum of six carriers and each transmit channel supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power of each transmit channel is 60 W. For the output power of a MIMO carrier, see Table 13-205. For the output power of a single-output carrier, see Table 13-204.

Table 13-207 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3829 without MIMO) Configurat Output ion (Carrier Power per x Sector) Carrier (W)




92 Ah

3x1

20

454

529

4.7

9.5

3x2

20

550

691

3.8

7.9

NOTE

l


l


l


Table 13-208 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3829 with MIMO) Configurat Output ion (Carrier Power per x Sector) Carrier (W)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)




92 Ah

3x2

20 + 20

932

1214

2.0

4.1

3x3

20 + 20

1152

1557

1.5

3.2


234



NOTE

l


l


l


l


Equipment Specifications Table 13-209 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3829. Table 13-209 Equipment specifications of an RRU3829 Type

Input Power


Weight

RRU3829









Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU3829


5% RH to 100% RH

(1 to 30) g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa




235






Protection Rating

RRU3829

l 3GPP TS 25.141

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65





Usage Scenario


Specifications

DC power port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

Antenna port

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


236



Port

Usage Scenario


Specifications

RET antenna port


Surge current

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA



Surge current

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA



Surge

250 A


TMA Support

RET Antenna Support

RRU3829

Supported

AISG2.0

NOTE


13.2.12 Technical Specifications for RRU3832 An RRU3832, which is a remote radio unit for UMTS, supports a maximum of six carriers.

Supported Modes and Frequency Bands Table 13-214 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3832.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


237



Table 13-214 Modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3832 Type

Mode




RRU3832

UMTS

2100

1920 to 1980

2110 to 2170

RF Specifications Table 13-215 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an RRU3832. NOTE


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


238




RRU383 2

RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y




2T2R


-126.1

-128.9

-131.6


Output Power

Power Consu mption

The RRU383 2 supports the maximu m power configur ation 2 x 60 W. The typical configur ations are as follows:


l Outp ut powe r of RRU 3832 with out MIM O l Outp ut powe r of RRU 3832 with MIM O


l Carr ier comb inati

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


239


Type


RX and TX Channe l

Capacit y




Output Power

Power Consu mption

ons supp orted by RRU 3832 in hybri d confi gurat ions

NOTE

The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, at the antenna connector over the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 0.001. NOTE

l


l



Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Carriers Power


Carriers Power


1

0

60

2

0

30

3

0

20

4

0

15

1

1

60

2

2

30

3

3

20


240





1

40 + 40

2

30 + 30

3

20 + 20

4

15 + 15

Table 13-218 Carrier combinations supported by RRU3832 in hybrid configurations Number of MIMO Carriers


1

5

2

4

3

2

NOTE

With hybrid configurations, each transmit channel supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power of each transmit channel is 60 W. For the output power of a MIMO carrier, see Table 13-217. For the output power of a single-output carrier, see Table 13-216.

Table 13-219 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3832 without MIMO) Configurat ion (Sector x Carrier)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)





92 Ah

3x1

20

500

560

4.1

8.6

3x2

20

560

695

3.6

7.7

3x3

20

695

860

2.8

5.8

3x4

20

845

1085

2.1

4.4


241



NOTE

l


l


l


l

In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

Table 13-220 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3832 with MIMO) Configurat ion (Sector x Carrier)





92 Ah

3x1

20 + 20

665

785

3.0

6.1

3x2

20 + 20

845

1070

2.1

4.4

3x3

20 + 20

1040

1370

1.6

3.6

NOTE

l


l


l

In 3 x 1 configuration, one WBBPd2 board and one WMPT board are configured.

l


l


Equipment Specifications Table 13-221 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3832.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


242




Input Power


Weight

RRU3832


l 400 mm x 300 mm x 100 mm (without the housing)







Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU3832


5% RH to 100% RH

(1 to 30) g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa





Protection Rating

RRU3832

l 3GPP TS 25.141

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


243






Usage Scenario


Specifications

DC power port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

Antenna port


Surge current



Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current


Surge current

RET antenna port


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


244



Port

Usage Scenario


Specifications



Surge

250 A


TMA Support

RET Antenna Support

RRU3832

Supported

AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

NOTE


13.2.13 Technical Specifications for RRU3201 This section describes the technical specifications of the RRU3201.

Working Mode and Frequency Band Table 13-226 describes the working mode and frequency bands of the RRU3201. Table 13-226 Working mode and frequency bands of the RRU3201 Type

Workin g Mode


RX Band (MHz)

TX Band (MHz)

RRU3201

LTE FDD

700 (band 13)

777 to 787

746 to 756

2600 (band 7)

Band C: 2500 to 2520

Band C: 2620 to 2640

Band D: 2510 to 2560

Band D: 2630 to 2680

Band E: 2550 to 2570

Band E: 2670 to 2690

RF Specifications Table 13-227 describes the RF specifications of the RRU3201. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


245



The receiver sensitivity, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, is measured under 5 MHz channel bandwidth @ FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R=1/3, 25 RB). Table 13-227 RF specifications of the RRU3201 Type

RRU3 201

RX and TX Chann els

Capacity

2T2R

One carrier. The bandwidth of each carrier can be:

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)

l 5 MHz or 10 MHz in the 700 MHz band l 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz in the 2600 MHz band

1T1R

1T2R

l 700 (band 13): -105. 8

l 700 (band 13): -108. 6

l 2600: -105. 8

l 2600: -108. 6

Output Power (W)

Power Consumpt ion (W)

2 x 40

l 700 (band 13): 315 l 2600: 370

NOTE


Engineering Specifications Table 13-228 describes the physical specifications of the RRU3201. Table 13-228 Physical specifications of the RRU3201 Type

Input Power

Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth)

Weight (kg)

RRU3201


l 480 mm x 270 mm x 140 mm (18 L without the housing)

l ≤17.5 kg (without the housing)

l 485 mm x 285 mm x 170 mm (23.5 L with the housing)

l ≤19 kg (with the housing)

Table 13-229 describes the environmental specifications of the RRU3201.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


246



Table 13-229 Environmental specifications of the RRU3201 Type

Temperature

Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity

Atmospheri c Pressure

RRU3201

l -40ºC to +50ºC (with solar radiation of 1120 W/m2)

5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/ m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa

l -40ºC to +55ºC (without solar radiation)

Table 13-230 describes the compliance standards for the RRU3201. Table 13-230 Compliance standards of the RRU3201 Type



Ingress Protection (IP) Rating

RRU3201

l 3GPP TS 36.141

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65


Table 13-231 describes the surge protection specifications for the ports on the RRU3201. NOTE


Table 13-231 Surge protection specifications for the ports on the RRU3201 Port



Specification


All

Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Surge current Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


247


Port

Antenna port



All


Surge current

CPRI port

All

Surge

RET port

All

Surge current

Specification

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA 250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Antenna Capability Table 13-232 describes the antenna capability of the RRU3201. Table 13-232 Antenna capability of the RRU3201 Type



RRU3201

TMA supported


NOTE



Working Mode and Frequency Band Table 13-233 describes the working mode and frequency bands of the RRU3203.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


248



Table 13-233 Working mode and frequency bands of the RRU3203 Type

Worki ng Mode


RX Band (MHz)

TX Band (MHz)

RRU3203

LTE FDD

700 (band 12)

698 to 716

728 to 746

RF Specifications Table 13-234 describes the RF specifications of the RRU3203. The receiver sensitivity, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, is measured under 5 MHz channel bandwidth @ FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R=1/3, 25 RB). Table 13-234 RF specifications of the RRU3203 Type

RRU3 203

RX and TX Chan nels

Capacity

2T2R

One carrier. The bandwidth of each carrier can be 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, or 15 MHz.


1T2R

-105.8

-108.6

Output Power (W)

Power Consum ption (W)

2 x 40

300

NOTE



Input Power


Weight (kg)

RRU3203



l ≤23 kg (without the housing)

l 485 mm x 381 mm x 170 mm (31.4 L with the housing) Issue 12 (2013-05-27)



249



Table 13-236 describes the environmental specifications of the RRU3203. Table 13-236 Environmental specifications of the RRU3203 Type

Temperature

Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU32 03

l -40ºC to +50ºC (with solar radiation of 1120 W/ m2)

5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa






RRU3203

l 3GPP TS 36.141

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65




Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


250



Table 13-238 Surge protection specifications for the ports on the RRU3203 Port



Specification


All

Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

Antenna port

All

Surge current

CPRI port

All

Surge

RET port

All

Surge current

250 A Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA




RRU3203

TMA supported


NOTE



Working Mode and Frequency Band Table 13-240 describes the working mode and frequency bands of the RRU3220. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


251




Worki ng Mode


RX Band (MHz)

TX Band (MHz)

RRU3220

LTE FDD

DD 800 (band 20)

832 to 847

791 to 806

842 to 862

801 to 821


RRU3 220

RX and TX Chan nels

Capacity

2T2R



1T2R

-106.1

-108.9

Output Power (W)


2 x 40

290

NOTE


Engineering Specifications Table 13-242 describes the physical specifications of the RRU3220. Table 13-242 Physical specifications of the RRU3220

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Type

Input Power


Weight (kg)

RRU3220




l 400 mm x 240 mm x 160 mm (15 L with the housing)



252




Temperature

Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity

Atmospheri c Pressure

RRU3220


5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/ m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa






RRU3220

l 3GPP TS 36.141

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65




Table 13-245 Surge protection specifications for the ports on the RRU3220

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Port



Specification


All

Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)


253


Port

Antenna port



All


Specification

Surge current

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

CPRI port

All

Surge

RET port

All

Surge current

Alarm port

All

Surge current


3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA




RRU3220

TMA supported


NOTE





254




Worki ng Mode


RX Band (MHz)

TX Band (MHz)

RRU3221

LTE FDD

2600 (band 7)

2500 to 2570

2620 to 2690


RRU3 221

RX and TX Chan nels

Capacity

2T2R



1T2R

-106.0

-108.8

Output Power (W)


2 x 40

370

NOTE



Input Power


Weight (kg)

RRU3221



l ≤ 20 kg (without the housing)


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


l ≤ 22 kg (with the housing)

255




Temperature

Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity

Atmospher ic Pressure

RRU3221


5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/ m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa






RRU3221

l 3GPP TS 36.141

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65





Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Port



Specification


All

Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)


256


Port

Antenna port



All


Specification

Surge current

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

CPRI port

All

Surge

RET port

All

Surge current

Alarm port

All

Surge current


3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA




RRU3221

TMA supported


NOTE





257




Worki ng Mode


RX Band (MHz)

TX Band (MHz)

RRU3222

LTE FDD

DD 800 (band 20)

832 to 862

791 to 821


RRU3 222

RX and TX Chan nels

Capacity

2T2R

One carrier. The bandwidth of each carrier can be 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20MHz.


1T2R

-106.4

-109.2

Output Power (W)


2 x 40

300

NOTE


Engineering Specifications Table 13-256 describes the physical specifications of the RRU3222. Table 13-256 Physical specifications of the RRU3222

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Type

Input Power


Weight (kg)

RRU3222







258




Temperature

Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU322 2


5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa






RRU3222

l 3GPP TS 36.141

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65





Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Port



Specification


All

Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)


259


Port

Antenna port



All


Specification

Surge current

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

CPRI port

All

Surge

RET port

All

Surge current

Alarm port

All

Surge current


3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA




RRU3222

TMA supported


NOTE


13.2.18 Technical Specifications for RRU3908 RRU3908s are classified into RRU3908 V1 and RRU3908 V2. Adopting the software-defined radio (SDR) technology, RRU3908 modules can work in different modes with different configurations.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


260



Supported Modes and Frequency Bands Table 13-261 shows the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3908. Table 13-261 Modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3908 Type




Mode

RRU3908 V1

850

824 to 849

869 to 894

GSM and UMTS

900

890 to 915

935 to 960

880 to 905

925 to 950


1710 to 1755

1805 to 1850

GSM and LTE

1740 to 1785

1835 to 1880

1850 to 1890

1930 to 1970

1870 to 1910

1950 to 1990

850

824 to 849

869 to 894


900

890 to 915

935 to 960

880 to 915

925 to 960


1800

1900

RRU3908 V2

GSM and UMTS


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


261



NOTE

l The GSM receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 51.021, over the central band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 13 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 2%. The central band is the 80% of the full band. l The UMTS receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, over the full band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the BER does not exceed 0.001. l The LTE receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, under a 5 MHz channel bandwidth 5 MHz channel bandwidth based on the FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R = 1/3, 25 RBs) standard. l RRU3908 modules operating in GSM mode and in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band comply with the standard EN 301 502 V9.2.1. l RRU3908 modules operating in UMTS, LTE, or Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) mode and in 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band comply with the standard ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104. l RRU3908 modules operating in GSM mode and in the 850 or 1900 MHz frequency band comply with the standard 3GPP TS 45.005 V10.2.0 & 3GPP TS 51.021 V10.2.0. l RRU3908 modules operating in UMTS, LTE, or Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) mode and in 850 or 1900 MHz frequency band comply with the standard 3GPP TS 37.104 V10.4.0 & TS 37.141 V10.4.0. l AB Non-MSR indicates that A data is carried on one transmit channel of an RF module while B data is carried on the other transmit channel of the RF module. AB MSR indicates that A and B data is carried on the same transmit channel of an RF module.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


262



Table 13-262 RF specifications for an RRU3908 Ty pe


Capacit y




RR U3 908 V1

2T 2R

GSM: 6 TRXs

GSM: -113

GSM: -115.8 UMTS: -128.3

GSM: -118.5 (theoretical value)

LTE: -109.1

UMTS: -131

UMTS: 4 carriers LTE: 1 carrier, the bandwidt h is 5, 10, 15, or 20 MHz.

UMTS: -125.5 LTE: -106.3

LTE: -111.8

Output Power

Power Consum ption

l Outp ut Powe r of an RRU 3908 V1 (850 MHz/ 900 MHz/ 1800 MHz/ 1900 MHz, singl emode )

l Powe r consu mptio n of the DBS3 900 (confi gured with RRU 3908 V1, 900 MHz)

l Outp ut Powe r of an RRU 3908 V1 (900 MHz, GU NonMSR )

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


l Powe r consu mptio n of the DBS3 900 (confi gured with RRU 3908 V1, 1800 MHz)

263



Ty pe


Capacit y




RR U3 908 V2

2T 2R

GSM: 8 TRXs

GSM:

GSM:

GSM:

l 850/900 MHz PGSM: -113.5

l 850/900 MHz PGSM: -116.3

l 900 MHz EGSM: -113.3

l 900 MHz EGSM: -116.1

l 850/900 MHz PGSM: -119 (theoreti cal value)

l 900 MHz: 4 carrie rs

UMTS:

UMTS:

l 850/900 MHz PGSM: -125.5

l 850/900 MHz PGSM: -128.3

LTE: 1 carrier, the bandwidt h is 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, or 20 MHz.

l 900 MHz EGSM: -125.3

l 900 MHz EGSM: -128.1

LTE:

LTE:

l 900 MHz PGSM: -106.3

l 900 MHz PGSM: -109.1

l 900 MHz EGSM: -106.1

l 900 MHz EGSM: -108.9

UMTS: l 850 MHz: 2 carrie rs

l 900 MHz EGSM: -118.8 (theoreti cal value) UMTS: l 850/900 MHz PGSM: -131 l 900 MHz EGSM: -130.8 LTE: l 900 MHz PGSM: -111.8 l 900 MHz EGSM: -111.6

Output Power

Power Consum ption

l Outp ut Powe r of an RRU 3908 V2 (850 MHz/ 900 MHz, singl emode )

Power consump tion of the DBS390 0 (configu red with RRU390 8 V2, 850 MHz/ 900 MHz)

l Outp ut Powe r of an RRU 3908 V2 (850 MHz/ 900 MHz, GU NonMSR ) l Outp ut

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


264


Ty pe



Capacit y




Output Power

Power Consum ption

Powe r of an RRU 3908 V2 (850 MHz/ 900 MHz, GU MSR ) l Outp ut Powe r of an RRU 3908 V2 (900 MHz, GL MSR )

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


265



NOTE

l * indicates that the UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware. l Power sharing assumes a random distribution of UEs in the cell. l The output power is 1 dB lesser than the standard power when the RRU3908 is located at a height of 3500 m to 4500m; and is 2 dB lesser than the standard power when the RRU3908 is located at a height of 4500 m to 6000m. l For the RRU3908 V2 working in GSM mode and operating in the 900 MHz frequency band: after design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3908 V2 when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used. When the S7 or S8 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3908 V2. l Factors such as the site-to-site distance, frequency-reuse factor, power control algorithm, and traffic model affect the gain achieved by dynamic power allocation. Therefore, in most cases, the network planning can be based on the power specification achieved by dynamic power allocation. l Before activating the dynamic power sharing feature, enable the DTX and power control functions. In GBSS8.1, the dynamic power sharing feature is mutually exclusive with the GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell, GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing, and GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) features. In GBSS9.0 and later versions, the dynamic power sharing feature can be used together with these features. However, the dynamic power sharing feature currently cannot be used together with the GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001 Extended Cell features in GBSS8.1, GBSS9.0, and later versions.

Table 13-263 Output Power of an RRU3908 V1 (850 MHz/900 MHz/1800 MHz/1900 MHz, single-mode) Mode

GSM

UMTS

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)








1

0

0

40

40

0

0

2

0

0

40

40

0

0

3

0

0

20

20

0

0

4

0

0

15

20

0

0

5

0

0

12

12

0

0

6

0

0

10

12

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

40

0

0

1

0

0

0

2 x 30

0

0

2

0

0

0

30

0

0

2

0

0

0

2 x 15

0

0

3*

0

0

0

20*

0


266


Mode

LTE









0

4*

0

0

0

15*

0

0

0

1 (MIMO)

0

0

0

2 x 30

Table 13-264 Output Power of an RRU3908 V1 (900 MHz, GU Non-MSR) Mode





GSM + UMTS

1

1

40

30

1

1

30

40

1

2

30

20

2

1

20

30

2

1

15

40

2

2

15

20

3

1

10

30

3

2

10

10

4

1

7.5

20

4

2

7.5

10

5

1

6

20

NOTE

When operating in the 900 MHz frequency band, RRU3908 V2 supports 3 or 4 UMTS carriers.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


267



Table 13-265 Output Power of an RRU3908 V2 (850 MHz/900 MHz, single-mode) Mode

GSM

UMTS

LTE

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)








1

0

0

40

40

0

0

2

0

0

40

40

0

0

3

0

0

20

20

0

0

4

0

0

20

20

0

0

5

0

0

13

15

0

0

6

0

0

13

15

0

0

7

0

0

10

13

0

0

8

0

0

10

13

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

60

0

0

1 (MI MO)

0

0

0

2 x 40

0

0

2

0

0

0

40

0

0

2 (MI MO)

0

0

0

2 x 20

0

0

3

0

0

0

20

0

0

3 (MI MO)

0

0

0

2 x 10

0

0

4

0

0

0

20

0

0

4 (MI MO)

0

0

0

2 x 10

0

0

0

1 (MIMO, 2T2R)

0

0

0

2 x 40


268



Table 13-266 Output Power of an RRU3908 V2 (850 MHz/900 MHz, GU Non-MSR) Mode





GSM + UMTS

1

1

40

40

2

1

20

40

3

1

13

40

4

1

10

40

5

1

6

20

1

2

40

20

2

2

20

20

3

2

13

20

4

2

10

20

Table 13-267 Output Power of an RRU3908 V2 (850 MHz/900 MHz, GU MSR) Mode





GSM + UMTS

1

1

20

2 x 20

2

1

20

2 x 20

3

1

20

20

3

1

15

2 x 10

4

1

13

20

4

1

15

2 x 10

5

1

10

30

NOTE

When there are no more than three GSM carriers, LTE bandwidth can be 1.4, 3, 5, 10, or 15 MHz in the 900 MHz frequency band. When there are more than three GSM carriers, LTE bandwidth can be 1.4, 3, 5, or 10 MHz in the 900 MHz frequency band.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


269



Table 13-268 Output Power of an RRU3908 V2 (900 MHz, GL MSR) Mode





GSM + LTE

1

1

20

2 x 20

2

1

20

2 x 20

3

1

15

2 x 10

4

1

15

2 x 10

4

1

12

2 x 15

NOTE

l The typical power consumption and the maximum power consumption are measured when the base station works at a temperature of 25°C. l The typical power consumption for GSM is reached when the base station works with 30% load and power control and DTX are enabled. The maximum power consumption for GSM is reached when the base station works with 100% load. The power consumption for GSM is calculated based on the sharing power. l The typical power consumption for UMTS is reached when the base station works with 40% load. The maximum power consumption for UMTS is reached when the base station works with 100% load. l LTE typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 50% and LTE maximum power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 100%.

Table 13-269 Power consumption of the DBS3900 (configured with RRU3908 V1, 900 MHz) Mode

Configura tion




GSM

S2/2/2

20

760

910

S4/4/4

20

730

1070

S6/6/6

12

730

1070

3x1

20

490

590

3x2

20

640

790

3x3

20

880

1100

3x4

15

880

1110

GSM S2/2/2 x 2 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

870

1090

UMTS

GSM + UMTS

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l UMTS: 20


270


Mode


Configura tion




GSM S4/4/4 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 10

820

1050

GSM S4/4/4 + UMTS 3 x 2

l GSM: 10

820

1050

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 10

Table 13-270 Power consumption of the DBS3900 (configured with RRU3908 V1, 1800 MHz) Mode

Configura tion




GSM

S2/2/2

20

615

720

S4/4/4

20

855

1190

3 x 10 MHz

40

750

880

LTE

Table 13-271 Power consumption of the DBS3900 (configured with RRU3908 V2, 850 MHz/ 900 MHz) Mode

Configura tion




S2/2/2

20

550

650

S4/4/4

20

770

1085

S6/6/6

13

740

1085

3x1

20

450

520

3x2

20

565

710

LTE

3x1

2 x 20

675

800

GSM S2/2/2 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

920

1170

GSM + UMTS

GSM

UMTS

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l UMTS: 40


271


Mode


Configura tion




GSM S3/3/3 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 13

890

1170

GSM S4/4/4 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 10

880

1180

l UMTS: 40

l UMTS: 40


Power Supply


Weight (kg)

RRU3908 V1

l -48 V DC; voltage range: -36 V DC to -57 V DC



l 200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase; voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V AC l 100 V AC to 120 V AC or 200 V AC to 240 V AC dualphase; voltage range: 90 V AC to 135 V AC or 180 V AC to 270 V AC

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


272



Type

Power Supply


Weight (kg)

RRU3908 V2

l -48 V DC; voltage range: -36 V DC to -57 V DC



l 200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase; voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V AC l 100 V AC to 120 V AC or 200 V AC to 240 V AC dualphase; voltage range: 90 V AC to 135 V AC or 180 V AC to 270 V AC



Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU39 08 V1

l -40°C to +50° C (without solar radiation)

5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa

l -40°C to +45° C (with solar radiation) RRU39 08 V2

l -40°C to +55° C (without solar radiation) l -40°C to +50° C (with solar radiation)

Table 13-274 shows the standards with which an RRU3908 complies. Table 13-274 Standards with which an RRU3908 complies

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Type


Shock Protection


RRU3908 V1

l 3GPP TS 45.005

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65


273



Type


RRU3908 V2

l l l l

Shock Protection


3GPP TS 25.141 3GPP TS 36.141 3GPP TS 37.141 ETSI EN 300019-1-4 V2.1.2 (2003-04) Class 4.1: "Nonweatherprotected locations"

Table 13-275shows the surge protection specifications for the ports on an RRU3908. NOTE



Usage Scenario


Specification

DC port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

5 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surge current

AC port

Applicable to the scenario where RF modules are placed indoors

Applicable to the scenario where RF

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Surge

Surge current

Surge


274


Port

Usage Scenario


Specification

modules are placed outdoors

Surge current

Differential mode

40 kA

Common mode

40 kA


Surge current

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

CPRI port


Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current



Surge current

Local power monitoring port or alarm port

Applicable to the scenario where the power supply module and RRUs are installed back to back or the scenario where the distance between them is shorter than 1m

Surge

Antenna port

RET antenna port

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


250 A

275




TMA Capabilites


RRU3908 V1

Supported

Supports AISG2.0

RRU3908 V2

Supported

Supports AISG2.0

NOTE


13.2.19 Technical Specifications for RRU3926 RRU3926 modules are remote radio units and can work in different modes with different configurations and the software-defined radio (SDR) technique.





Mode

RRU3926

900

880 to 915

925 to 960

890 to 915

935 to 960

GSM, UMTS, GSM + UMTS

1710 to 1785

1805 to 1880

1800


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


276



NOTE

l The GSM receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 51.021, over the central band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 13 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 2%. The central band is the 80% of the full band. l The UMTS receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, over the full band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the BER does not exceed 0.001. l The RRU3926 that works in GSM mode and operates in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band complies with the EN 301 502 V9.2.1 standard. The RRU3926 that works in UMTS or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and operates in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band complies with the ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 standard and 3GPP TS 37.104 standard. l AB Non-MSR indicates that A data is carried on one transmit channel of an RF module while B data is carried on the other transmit channel of the RF module. AB MSR indicates that A and B data is carried on the same transmit channel of an RF module.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


277



Table 13-278 RF specifications of an RRU3926 Ty pe


Capacit y



Receiver Sensitivity with Four Antennas

RR U3 926

1T 2R

GSM: 8 TRXs

GSM:

GSM:

GSM:

l 900 MHz: -113.7

l 900 MHz: -116.5

l 1800 MHz: -114

l 1800 MHz: -116.8


UMTS:

UMTS:

l 900 MHz: -125.8

l 900 MHz: -128.6

l 1800 MHz: -126.1

l 1800 MHz: -128.9

UMTS: 6 carriers

l 1800 MHz: -119.5 (theoreti cal value) UMTS: l 900 MHz: -131.3 l 1800 MHz: -131.6

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


Output Power

Power Consum ption

l Outp ut powe r of RRU 3926 (900/ 1800 MHz, single mode )

l DBS3 900 powe r consu mpti on (RR U392 6 opera ting in the 900 MHz frequ ency band confi gure d)

l Outp ut powe r of RRU 3926 (900/ 1800 MHz, GU MSR )

l DBS3 900 powe r consu mpti on (RR U392 6 opera ting

278


Ty pe



Capacit y



Receiver Sensitivity with Four Antennas

Output Power

Power Consum ption

in the 1800 MHz frequ ency band confi gure d)

NOTE

l Power sharing assumes a random distribution of UEs in the cell. l If an RRU3926 is placed at an altitude of 3500 to 4500 meters, its power reduces by 1 dB. If an RRU3926 is placed at an altitude of 4500 to 6000 meters, its power reduces by 2 dB. l For the RRU3926 working in GSM mode: when the S1 configuration is applied, the maximum output power of each carrier on the RRU3926 is 80 W. If the output power of 60 W or 80 W is required, the related license must be obtained. After design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3926 when the S1, S2, or S3 configuration is used. When any of the S4 through S8 configurations is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3926. l Factors such as the site-to-site distance, frequency-reuse factor, power control algorithm, and traffic model affect the gain achieved by dynamic power allocation. Therefore, in most cases, the network planning can be based on the power specification achieved by dynamic power allocation. l Before activating the dynamic power sharing feature, enable the DTX and power control functions. In GBSS8.1, the dynamic power sharing feature is mutually exclusive with the GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell, GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing, and GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) features. In GBSS9.0 and later versions, the dynamic power sharing feature can be used together with these features. However, the dynamic power sharing feature currently cannot be used together with the GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001 Extended Cell features in GBSS8.1, GBSS9.0, and later versions.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


279



Table 13-279 Output power of RRU3926 (900/1800 MHz, single-mode) Mode

Numb er of GSM Carrier s


Output Power of Each GSM Carrier (W)

Output Sharing Power of Each GSM Carrier (W)

Output Power of Each UMTS Carrier (W)

GSM

1

0

80

80

0

2

0

40

40

0

3

0

27

31

0

4

0

20

27

0

5

0

16

20

0

6

0

12

20

0

7

0

10

16

0

8

0

7

12

0

0

1

0

0

80

0

2

0

0

40

0

3

0

0

25

0

4

0

0

20

0

5 (hardware ready)

0

0

16

0

6 (hardware ready)

0

0

12

UMTS

Table 13-280 Output power of RRU3926 (900/1800 MHz, GU MSR)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Mode





GU

1

1

40

40

1

2

40

20

2

1

30

20

2

1

20

40

2

2

20

20

3

1

20

20

3

2

16

10


280


Mode






4

1

12

20

4

2

12

10

5

1

10

20

5

2

10

10

6

1

10

10

6

2

8

10

7

1

8

10

NOTE

l Typical and maximum power consumption are measured when the environment temperature is 25°C. l GSM typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 30%, and the power control and DTX functions are enabled. GSM maximum power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 100%. GSM power consumption is calculated when the dynamic power sharing function is enabled. l UMTS typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 40% and UMTS maximum power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 100%.

Table 13-281 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3926 operating in the 900 MHz frequency band configured) Mode

Configuration




GSM

S2/2/2

20

535

635

S4/4/4

20

655

960

3x1

20

445

525

3x2

20

555

695

GSM S2/2/2 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

725

885

GSM S3/3/3 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

795

1045

UMTS

GU

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20


281




Configuration




GSM

S2/2/2

20

587

690

S4/4/4

20

725

1020


Input Power


Weight (kg)

RRU3926


l 400 mm x 240 mm x 160 mm (with the shell)

l 15 (with the shell)


l 13.5 (without the shell)

l 400 mm x 220 mm x 140 mm (without the shell)



Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU39 26


5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa

l -40°C to +50° C (with solar radiation)


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


282






Protection Rating

RRU3926

l 3GPP TS 45.005

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65

l 3GPP TS 25.141 l 3GPP TS 36.141 l 3GPP TS 37.141 l ETSI EN 300019-1-4 V2.1.2 (2003-04) Class 4.1: "Nonweatherprotected locations"




Usage Scenario


Specification



Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

Antenna port

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


Surge current

CPRI port


Surge

RGPS port


Surge current

250 A

Differential mode


3 kA

283


Port

RET antenna port


Usage Scenario



Surge current



Surge current


Applicable to the scenario where the power supply module and the RRU are installed back to back or the scenario where the distance between them is shorter than 1m

Surge

Specification

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA 250 A


TMA Support

Supported RET Antennas

RRU3926

Supported

AISG2.0

NOTE


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


284



13.2.20 RRU3936 Technical Specifications RRU3936 modules are remote radio units and can work in different modes with different configurations and the software-defined radio (SDR) technique.

Supported Modes and Frequency Bands The following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3936. Table 13-288 Modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3936 Type




Mode

RRU3936

900

880 to 915

925 to 960

890 to 915

935 to 960


1710 to 1785

1805 to 1880

1800


RF Specifications Table 13-289 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an RRU3936. NOTE

l ATBR in the RX and TX Channels column indicates that this RF module is configured with A transmit channels and B receive channels. l EF MSR indicates that E and F data is carried on the same transmit channel of an RF module. l The GSM receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 51.021, over the central band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 13 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 2%. The central band is the 80% of the full band. l The UMTS receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, over the full band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the BER does not exceed 0.001. l The RRU3936 that works in GSM mode and operates in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band complies with the EN 301 502 V9.2.1 standard. l The RRU3936 that works in UMTS, LTE, or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and operates in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band complies with the ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104 standards.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


285



Table 13-289 RF specifications of an RRU3936 Ty pe


Capacit y

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Receive r Sensitiv ity with One Antenn a

Receiver Sensitivi ty with Two Antenna s


RR U3 936

1T 2R

GSM: 8 TRXs

GSM:

GSM:

GSM:

l 900 MHz: -113. 7

l 900 MHz: -116.5

l 900 MHz: -119. 2 (theor etical value)

UMTS: 6 carriers

l 1800 MHz: -114 UMTS: l 900 MHz: -125. 8 l 1800 MHz: -126. 1

l 1800 MHz: -116.8 UMTS: l 900 MHz: -128.6 l 1800 MHz: -128.9

l 1800 MHz: -119. 5 (theor etical value) UMTS: l 900 MHz: -131. 3 l 1800 MHz: -131. 6

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


Output Power

Power Consumptio n

l Output power for the RRU393 6 (GSM, 900 MHz/ 1800 MHz)

l DBS3900 power consumpti on (RRU3936 operating in the 900 MHz frequency band configure d)

l Output power for the RRU393 6 (UMTS, 900 MHz/ 1800 MHz) l Output power for the RRU393 6 (GU MSR, 900 MHz/ 1800 MHz)

l DBS3900 power consumpti on (RRU3936 operating in the 1800 MHz frequency band configure d)

286



NOTE

l If the power sharing feature is activated, assume that UEs in a cell are randomly located. l If the RF module is placed at an altitude of 3500 to 4500 meters, its power reduces by 1 dB. If the RF module is placed at an altitude of 4500 to 6000 meters, its power reduces by 2 dB. l Station spacing, frequency multiplexing factor, power control algorithm, and traffic model all affect the gains of dynamic power sharing. In most cases, network plans are designed on the basis of power specifications of dynamic power sharing. l Before activating the dynamic power sharing feature, enable the DTX and power control functions. In GBSS8.1, the dynamic power sharing feature is mutually exclusive with the GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell, GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing, and GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) features. In GBSS9.0 and later versions, the dynamic power sharing feature can be used together with these features. However, the dynamic power sharing feature currently cannot be used together with the GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001 Extended Cell features in GBSS8.1, GBSS9.0, and later versions. l For the RRU3936 working in GSM mode: when the S1 configuration is applied, the maximum output power of each carrier on the RRU3936 is 80 W. If the output power of 60 W or 80 W is required, the related license must be obtained. After design optimization, the 8 phase shift keying (8PSK) and Gaussian minimum shiftfrequency keying (GMSK) modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the the RF module when the S1, S2, or S3 configuration is used. When any of the S4 through S8 configurations is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3936.

Table 13-290 Output power for the RRU3936 (GSM, 900 MHz/1800 MHz) Mode

Total Number of GSM Carriers


Output Power per GSM Carrier With Dynamic Power Sharing (W)

GSM

1

80

80

2

40

40

3

27

31

4

20

27

5

16

20

6

12

20

7

10

16

8

7

12

NOTE

In the following table, * indicates that the UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


287



Table 13-291 Output power for the RRU3936 (UMTS, 900 MHz/1800 MHz) Mode

Total Number of UMTS Carriers


UMTS

1

80

2

40

3

25

4

20

5*

16*

6*

12*

Table 13-292 Output power for the RRU3936 (GU MSR, 900 MHz/1800 MHz)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Mode

Total Number of GSM Carriers

Total Number of UMTS Carriers



GSM + UMTS

1

1

40

40

1

2

40

20

2

1

30

20

2

1

20

40

2

2

20

20

3

1

20

20

3

2

16

10

4

1

12

20

4

2

12

10

5

1

10

20

5

2

10

10

6

1

10

10

6

2

8

10

7

1

8

10


288



NOTE

l Typical and maximum power consumption are measured when the environment temperature is 25°C. l GSM typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 30%, and the power control and DTX functions are enabled. GSM maximum power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 100%. GSM power consumption is calculated when the dynamic power sharing function is enabled. l UMTS typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 40% and UMTS maximum power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 100%.


Configuration




GSM

S2/2/2

20

535

635

S4/4/4

20

655

960

3x1

20

445

525

3x2

20

555

695

GSM S2/2/2 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

725

885

GSM S3/3/3 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

795

1045

UMTS

GU

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20


Configuration




GSM

S2/2/2

20

587

690

S4/4/4

20

725

1020

Engineering Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3936.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


289




Input Power


Weight (kg)

RRU3936


400 mm x 300 mm x 120 mm (with the shell)

15 (with the shell)


The following table lists the environmental specifications of an RRU3936. Table 13-296 Environmental specifications of an RRU3936 Type


Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU39 36


5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa


The following table lists the compliance standards for an RRU3936. Table 13-297 Compliance standards for an RRU3936 Type



Protection Rating

RRU3936


NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65


Table 13-298 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3936. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


290



NOTE



Usage Scenario


Specification



Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

Antenna port


Surge current

CPRI port


Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current


Surge current

RET antenna port


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


291



Port

Usage Scenario


Specification


Applicable to the scenario where the power supply module and the RRU are installed back to back or the scenario where the distance between them is shorter than 1m

Surge

250 A

Antenna Capability The following table lists the antenna capability of an RRU3936. Table 13-299 Antenna capability of an RRU3936 Type

TMA Support

Supported RET Antennas

RRU3936

Supported

AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

NOTE

For RF moudles supporting RET antennas, the feeding voltage is 12 V and feeding current is 2.3 A.

13.2.21 Technical Specifications for RRU3928 Adopting the software-defined radio (SDR) technology, RRU3928 modules can work in different modes with different configurations.

Supported Modes and Frequency Bands Table 13-300 shows the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3928.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


292







Mode

RRU3928

900

880 to 915

925 to 960

1800

1710 to 1785

1805 to 1880


RF Specifications Table 13-301 shows RF specifications for an RRU3928. NOTE

l The GSM receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 51.021, over the central band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 13 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 2%. The central band is the 80% of the full band. l The UMTS receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, over the full band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the BER does not exceed 0.001. l The LTE receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, under a 5 MHz channel bandwidth 5 MHz channel bandwidth based on the FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R = 1/3, 25 RBs) standard. l RRU3928 modules operating in GSM mode and in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band comply with the standard EN 301 502 V9.2.1. l RRU3928 modules operating in UMTS, LTE, or Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) mode and in 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band comply with the standard ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104. l AB Non-MSR indicates that A data is carried on one transmit channel of an RF module while B data is carried on the other transmit channel of the RF module. AB MSR indicates that A and B data is carried on the same transmit channel of an RF module.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


293





Capacit y




RR U3 928

2T 2R

GSM: 8 TRXs

GSM:

GSM:

GSM:

l 900 MHz: -113.7

l 900 MHz: -116.5

l 1800 MHz: -114

l 1800 MHz: -116.8


UMTS:

UMTS:

l 900 MHz: -125.8

l 900 MHz: -128.6

l 1800 MHz: -126.1

l 1800 MHz: -128.9

LTE:

LTE:

l 900 MHz: -106.3

l 900 MHz: -109.1

l 1800 MHz: -106.6

l 1800 MHz: -109.4

UMTS: 4 carriers LTE: 2 carriers, the bandwidt h is 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, or 20 MHz.


Output Power

Power Consum ption

l Outp ut Powe r of an RRU 3928 (900 MHz/ 1800 MHz, single mode )

l Powe r consu mpti on of the DBS3 900 (confi gure d with RRU 3928, 900 MHz )

l Outp ut Powe r of an RRU 3928 (900 MHz/ 1800 MHz, GU NonMSR ) l Outp ut Powe

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


l Powe r consu mpti on of the DBS3 900 (confi gure d with RRU 3928, 1800 MHz )

294


Ty pe



Capacit y




Output Power

Power Consum ption

r of an RRU 3928 (900 MHz/ 1800 MHz, GU MSR ) l Outp ut Powe r of an RRU 3928 (900 MHz/ 1800 MHz, GL MSR )

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


295



NOTE

l Power sharing assumes a random distribution of UEs in the cell. l The output power is 1 dB lesser than the standard power when the RRU3928 is located at a height of 3500 m to 4500m; and is 2 dB lesser than the standard power when the RRU3928 is located at a height of 4500 m to 6000m. l For the RRU3928 working in GSM mode: after design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3928 when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used. When the S7 or S8 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3928. l Factors such as the site-to-site distance, frequency-reuse factor, power control algorithm, and traffic model affect the gain achieved by dynamic power allocation. Therefore, in most cases, the network planning can be based on the power specification achieved by dynamic power allocation. l Before activating the dynamic power sharing feature, enable the DTX and power control functions. In GBSS8.1, the dynamic power sharing feature is mutually exclusive with the GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell, GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing, and GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) features. In GBSS9.0 and later versions, the dynamic power sharing feature can be used together with these features. However, the dynamic power sharing feature currently cannot be used together with the GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001 Extended Cell features in GBSS8.1, GBSS9.0, and later versions.

Table 13-302 Output Power of an RRU3928 (900 MHz/1800 MHz, single-mode) M od e


Num ber of UMT S Carri ers

Nu mbe r of LTE Carr iers





G S M

1

0

0

40

40

0

0

2

0

0

40

40

0

0

3

0

0

20

20

0

0

4

0

0

20

20

0

0

5

0

0

13

15

0

0

6

0

0

13

15

0

0

7

0

0

10

13

0

0

8

0

0

10

13

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

40

0

0

2

0

0

0

40

0

0

3

0

0

0

20

0

0

4

0

0

0

20

0

U M TS

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


296


M od e

LT E



Num ber of UMT S Carri ers

Nu mbe r of LTE Carr iers





0

1 (MIM O)

0

0

0

2 x 40

0

0

2 (MIM O)

0

0

0

2 x 20

0

0

3 (MIM O)

0

0

0

2 x 10

0

0

4 (MIM O)

0

0

0

2 x 10

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

2 x 40

0

0

2

0

0

0

2 x 20

Table 13-303 Output Power of an RRU3928 (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GU Non-MSR)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Mode





GSM + UMTS

1

1

40

40

2

1

20

40

3

1

13

40

4

1

10

40

1

2

40

20

2

2

20

20

3

2

13

20

4

2

10

20


297



Table 13-304 Output Power of an RRU3928 (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GU MSR) Mode





GSM + UMTS

3

1

20

20

4

1

13

20

5

1

10

20

1

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

2

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

3

1 (MIMO)

10

2 x 20

4

1 (MIMO)

10

2 x 20

1

2 (MIMO)

20

2 x 10

2

2 (MIMO)

20

2 x 10

3

2 (MIMO)

10

2 x 10

4

2 (MIMO)

10

2 x 10

Table 13-305 Output Power of an RRU3928 (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GL MSR)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Mode





GSM + LTE

1

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

2

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

3

1 (MIMO)

10

2 x 20

3

1 (MIMO)

15

2 x 10

4

1 (MIMO)

10

2 x 20

4

1 (MIMO)

15

2 x 10

5

1 (MIMO)

10

2 x 10

6

1 (MIMO)

10

2 x 10


298



NOTE


Table 13-306 Power consumption of the DBS3900 (configured with RRU3928, 900 MHz) Mode

Configuration




GSM

S2/2/2

20

560

650

S4/4/4

20

740

1025

3x1

20

510

585

3x2

20

585

720

LTE

3 x 10 MHz

40

900

1110

GSM + UMTS

GSM S2/2/2 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

820

985

GSM S3/3/3 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

865

1120


l GSM: 20

930

1140


l GSM: 20

870

1065


l GSM: 20

850

1140

UMTS

GSM + LTE

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40


299




Configuratio n




GSM

S2/2/2

20

560

665

S4/4/4

20

755

1040

3x1

20

525

585

3x2

20

600

735

LTE

3 x 10 MHz

40

915

1125

GSM + UMTS

GSM S2/2/2 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

835

1000

GSM S3/3/3 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

880

1135


l GSM: 20

945

1155


l GSM: 20

885

1095


l GSM: 20

900

1155

UMTS

GSM + LTE

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40


Power Supply


Weight (kg)

RRU3928





Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


300





Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU39 28


5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa




Shock Protection


RRU3928

l 3GPP TS 45.005

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65


Table 13-311 shows the surge protection specifications for the ports on an RRU3928. NOTE


Table 13-311 Surge protection specifications for the ports on an RRU3928

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Port

Usage Scenario


Specification

DC port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)


301


Port

Antenna port

Usage Scenario


Specification

Surge current

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA


Surge current

CPRI port


Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current



Surge current



Surge

RET antenna port

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


250 A

302




TMA Capabilites


RRU3928

Supported

Supports AISG2.0

NOTE



Supported Modes and Frequency Bands Table 13-313 shows the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3929. Table 13-313 Modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3929 Type




Mode

RRU3929

900

880 to 915

925 to 960

1800

1710 to 1785

1805 to 1880



Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


303



NOTE

l The GSM receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 51.021, over the central band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 13 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not exceed 2%. The central band is the 80% of the full band. l The UMTS receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, over the full band at the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the BER does not exceed 0.001. l The LTE receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, under a 5 MHz channel bandwidth 5 MHz channel bandwidth based on the FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R = 1/3, 25 RBs) standard. l RRU3929 modules operating in GSM mode and in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band comply with the standard EN 301 502 V9.2.1. l RRU3929 modules operating in UMTS, LTE, or Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) mode and in 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band comply with the standard ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104. l AB Non-MSR indicates that A data is carried on one transmit channel of an RF module while B data is carried on the other transmit channel of the RF module. AB MSR indicates that A and B data is carried on the same transmit channel of an RF module.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


304





Capacit y




RR U3 929

2T 2R

GSM: 8 TRXs

GSM:

GSM:

GSM:

l 900 MHz: -113.7

l 900 MHz: -116.5

l 1800 MHz: -114

l 1800 MHz: -116.8


UMTS:

UMTS:

l 900 MHz: -125.8

l 900 MHz: -128.6

l 1800 MHz: -126.1

l 1800 MHz: -128.9

LTE:

LTE:

l 900 MHz: -106.3

l 900 MHz: -109.1

l 1800 MHz: -106.6

l 1800 MHz: -109.4

UMTS: l NonMIM O: 6 carrie rs l MIM O: 4 carrie rs LTE: 2 carriers, the bandwidt h is 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15, or 20 MHz.


Output Power

Power Consum ption


Power consump tion of the DBS390 0 (configu red with RRU392 9, 900 MHz/ 1800 MHz)


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


305


Ty pe



Capacit y




Output Power

Power Consum ption

r of an RRU 3929 (900 MHz/ 1800 MHz, GU MSR ) l Outp ut Powe r of an RRU 3929 (900 MHz/ 1800 MHz, GL MSR )

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


306



NOTE

l Power sharing assumes a random distribution of UEs in the cell. l The output power is 1 dB lesser than the standard power when the RRU3929 is located at a height of 3500 m to 4500m; and is 2 dB lesser than the standard power when the RRU3929 is located at a height of 4500 m to 6000m. l For the RRU3929 working in GSM mode: when the S1 or S2 configuration is applied, the maximum output power of each carrier on the RRU3929 is 60 W. If the output power of 60 W is required, the related license must be obtained. After design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3929 when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used. When the S7 or S8 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3929. l Factors such as the site-to-site distance, frequency-reuse factor, power control algorithm, and traffic model affect the gain achieved by dynamic power allocation. Therefore, in most cases, the network planning can be based on the power specification achieved by dynamic power allocation. l Before activating the dynamic power sharing feature, enable the DTX and power control functions. In GBSS8.1, the dynamic power sharing feature is mutually exclusive with the GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell, GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing, and GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) features. In GBSS9.0 and later versions, the dynamic power sharing feature can be used together with these features. However, the dynamic power sharing feature currently cannot be used together with the GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001 Extended Cell features in GBSS8.1, GBSS9.0, and later versions.

Table 13-315 Output Power of an RRU3929 (900 MHz/1800 MHz, single-mode) Mod e








GSM

1

0

0

60

60

0

0

2

0

0

60

60

0

0

3

0

0

30

30

0

0

4

0

0

30

30

0

0

5

0

0

20

25

0

0

6

0

0

20

25

0

0

7

0

0

15

20

0

0

8

0

0

15

20

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

60

0

0

2

0

0

0

60

0

0

3

0

0

0

30

0

0

4

0

0

0

30

0

UMT S

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


307


Mod e

LTE









0

5

0

0

0

20

0

0

6

0

0

0

20

0

0

1 (MIMO)

0

0

0

2 x 40

0

0

2 (MIMO)

0

0

0

2 x 30

0

0

3 (MIMO)

0

0

0

2 x 20

0

0

4 (MIMO)

0

0

0

2 x 15

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

5/10/15/ 20 MHz: 2 x 60 1.4/3 MHz: 2 x 40

0

0

2

0

0

0

2 x 30

0

0

2

0

0

0

Carrier1: 2 x 20 Carrier2: 2 x 40


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Mode





GSM + UMTS

1

1

60

60

1

2

60

30

1

3

60

20

2

1

30

60

2

2

30

30


308



Mode





2

3

30

20

2

4

30

15

3

1

20

60

3

2

20

30

3

3

20

20

3

4

20

15

4

1

15

60

4

2

15

30

4

3

15

20

4

4

15

15

5

1

10

60

5

2

10

30

5

3

10

20

6

1

7

60

6

2

7

30

Table 13-317 Output Power of an RRU3929 (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GU MSR)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Mode





GSM + UMTS

1

2

30

30

1

2

20

40

2

1

40

20

2

1

30

30

2

2

20

40

2

2

30

30

2

2

40

20

3

1

30

30

3

1

20

40


309


Mode

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)






3

2

20

20

3

2

15

30

4

1

20

40

4

2

20

20

4

2

15

30

5

1

20

20

5

1

15

30

5

2

13

20

6

1

15

30

6

2

12

20

7

1

10

20

1

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 40

1

1 (MIMO)

30

2 x 30

1

1 (MIMO)

40

2 x 20

1

2 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

2

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 40

2

1 (MIMO)

30

2 x 30

2

1 (MIMO)

40

2 x 20

2

2 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

2

2 (MIMO)

30

2 x 15

3

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

3

1 (MIMO)

15

2 x 30

3

2 (MIMO)

15

2 x 15

3

2 (MIMO)

20

2 x 10

3

2 (MIMO)

10

2 x 20

4

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

4

1 (MIMO)

15

2 x 30

4

2 (MIMO)

15

2 x 15

4

2 (MIMO)

20

2 x 10


310


Mode






4

2 (MIMO)

10

2 x 20

Table 13-318 Output Power of an RRU3929 (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GL MSR) Mode





GSM + LTE

1

1 (MIMO)

40

2 x 20

1

1 (MIMO)

30

2 x 30

1

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 40

2

1 (MIMO)

40

2 x 20

2

1 (MIMO)

30

2 x 30

2

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 40

3

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

4

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

5

1 (MIMO)

12

2 x 20

6

1 (MIMO)

12

2 x 20

NOTE


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


311



Table 13-319 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3929 operating in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band configured) Mode

Configuration




GSM

S2/2/2

20

675

795

S4/4/4

20

915

1260

S6/6/6

20

1005

1530

3x1

20

585

675

3x2

20

660

840

LTE

3 x 10 MHz

40

990

1290

GSM + UMTS

GSM S2/2/2 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

850

1030

GSM S3/3/3 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

1060

1360

GSM S4/4/4 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

1105

1495


l GSM: 20

1305

1660


l GSM: 20

1155

1525


l GSM: 20

1215

1660

UMTS

GSM + LTE

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40

l LTE: 40


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


312




Power Supply


Weight (kg)

RRU3929







Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU39 29


5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa




Shock Protection


RRU3929

l 3GPP TS 45.005

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65


Table 13-323 shows the surge protection specifications for the ports on an RRU3929. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


313



NOTE



Usage Scenario


Specification

DC port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

Antenna port


Surge current

CPRI port


Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current


Surge current

RET antenna port


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


314



Port

Usage Scenario


Specification



Surge

250 A


TMA Capabilites


RRU3929

Supported

Supports AISG2.0

NOTE



Supported Modes and Frequency Bands Table 13-325 shows the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3942.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


315







Mode

RRU3942

1900

1850 to 1910

1930 to 1990


850

824 to 849

869 to 894


RF Specifications Table 13-326 shows RF specifications for an RRU3942. NOTE

l The receiver sensitivity of GSM, as recommended in 3GPP TS 51.021, is measured in the central band (80% of the entire operating band, excluding the edge band) at the antenna connector on the condition that the channel rate is 13 kbit/s and the Bit Error Rate (BER) is not higher than 2%. l The receiver sensitivity of UMTS, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, is measured in the entire operating band at the antenna connector on the condition that the channel rate is 12.2 kbit/s and the BER is not higher than 0.001. l The RRU3942 that works in GSM mode and operates in the 850 MHz/1900 MHz frequency band complies with the 3GPP TS 45.005 V10.2.0 and 3GPP TS 51.021 V10.2.0 standards. The RRU3942 that works in UMTS or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and operates in the 850 MHz/1900 MHz frequency band complies with the 3GPP TS 37.104 V10.4.0 and TS 37.141 V10.4.0 standards. l AB Non-MSR indicates that A data is carried on one transmit channel of an RF module while B data is carried on the other transmit channel of the RF module. AB MSR indicates that A and B data is carried on the same transmit channel of an RF module.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


316





Capacit y




RR U3 942

2T 2R

GSM: 8 TRXs

GSM:

GSM:

GSM:

l 850 MHz: -113.4

l 850 MHz: -116.2

l 1900 MHz: -113.7

l 1900 MHz: -116.5


UMTS:

UMTS:

l 850 MHz: -125.5

l 850 MHz: -128.3

l 1900 MHz: -125.8

l 1900 MHz: -128.6

UMTS: l NonMIM O: 6 carrie rs l MIM O: 4 carrie rs

l 1900 MHz: -119.2 (theoreti cal value) UMTS l 850 MHz: -131 l 1900 MHz: -131.3

Output Power

Power Consum ption


Power consump tion of the DBS390 0 (configu red with RRU394 2, 1900 MHz)


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


317


Ty pe



Capacit y




Output Power

Power Consum ption

r of an RRU 3942 (850 MHz/ 1900 MHz, GU MSR )

NOTE

l Power sharing assumes a random distribution of UEs in the cell. l The output power is 1 dB lesser than the standard power when the RRU3942 is located at a height of 3500 m to 4500m; and is 2 dB lesser than the standard power when the RRU3942 is located at a height of 4500 m to 6000m. l For the RRU3942 working in GSM mode: when the S1 or S2 configuration is applied, the maximum output power of each carrier on the RRU3942 is 60 W. If the output power of 60 W is required, the related license must be obtained. After design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3942 when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used. When the S7 or S8 configurations is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3942. l Factors such as the site-to-site distance, frequency-reuse factor, power control algorithm, and traffic model affect the gain achieved by dynamic power allocation. Therefore, in most cases, the network planning can be based on the power specification achieved by dynamic power allocation. l Before activating the dynamic power sharing feature, enable the DTX and power control functions. In GBSS8.1, the dynamic power sharing feature is mutually exclusive with the GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell, GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing, and GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) features. In GBSS9.0 and later versions, the dynamic power sharing feature can be used together with these features. However, the dynamic power sharing feature currently cannot be used together with the GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001 Extended Cell features in GBSS8.1, GBSS9.0, and later versions.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


318



Table 13-327 Output Power of an RRU3942 (850 MHz/1900 MHz, single-mode) Mode

Numbe r of GSM Carriers





GSM

1

0

60

60

0

2

0

60

60

0

3

0

30

30

0

4

0

30

30

0

5

0

20

25

0

6

0

20

25

0

7

0

15

20

0

8

0

15

20

0

0

1

0

0

60

0

2

0

0

60

0

3

0

0

30

0

4

0

0

30

0

5

0

0

20

0

6

0

0

20

0

1 (MIMO)

0

0

2 x 40

0

2 (MIMO)

0

0

2 x 30

0

3 (MIMO)

0

0

2 x 20

0

4 (MIMO)

0

0

2 x 15

UMTS


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Mode





GSM + UMTS

1

1

60

60

1

2

60

30

1

3

60

20

2

1

30

60


319



Mode





2

2

30

30

2

3

30

20

2

4

30

15

3

1

20

60

3

2

20

30

3

3

20

20

3

4

20

15

4

1

15

60

4

2

15

30

4

3

15

20

4

4

15

15

5

1

10

60

5

2

10

30

5

3

10

20

6

1

7

60

6

2

7

30

Table 13-329 Output Power of an RRU3942 (850 MHz/1900 MHz, GU MSR)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Mode





GSM + UMTS

1

2

30

30

1

2

20

40

2

1

40

20

2

1

30

30

2

2

20

40

2

2

30

30

2

2

40

20

3

1

30

30


320


Mode

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)






3

1

20

40

3

2

20

20

3

2

15

30

4

1

20

40

4

2

20

20

4

2

15

30

5

1

20

20

5

1

15

30

5

2

13

20

6

1

15

30

6

2

12

20

7

1

10

20

1

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 40

1

1 (MIMO)

30

2 x 30

1

1 (MIMO)

40

2 x 20

1

2 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

2

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 40

2

1 (MIMO)

30

2 x 30

2

1 (MIMO)

40

2 x 20

2

2 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

2

2 (MIMO)

30

2 x 15

3

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

3

1 (MIMO)

15

2 x 30

3

2 (MIMO)

15

2 x 15

3

2 (MIMO)

20

2 x 10

3

2 (MIMO)

10

2 x 20

4

1 (MIMO)

20

2 x 20

4

1 (MIMO)

15

2 x 30

4

2 (MIMO)

15

2 x 15


321



Mode





4

2 (MIMO)

20

2 x 10

4

2 (MIMO)

10

2 x 20

NOTE

l The typical power consumption and the maximum power consumption are measured when the base station works at a temperature of 25°C. l The typical power consumption for GSM is reached when the base station works with 30% load and power control and DTX are enabled. The maximum power consumption for GSM is reached when the base station works with 100% load. l The typical power consumption for UMTS is reached when the base station works with 40% load. The maximum power consumption for UMTS is reached when the base station works with 100% load. l The power consumption for GSM is calculated based on the sharing power.


Configuratio n




GSM

S2/2/2

20

690

800

S4/4/4

20

935

1265

S6/6/6

20

1100

1660

3x1

20

635

715

3x2

20

765

910

GSM S2/2/2 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

1020

1205

GSM S3/3/3 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

1100

1405

GSM S4/4/4 + UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20

1200

1545

UMTS

GSM + UMTS

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20

l UMTS: 20


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


322




Power Supply


Weight (kg)

RRU3942







Relative Humidity

Absolute Humidity


RRU39 42


5% RH to 100% RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106 kPa




Shock Protection


RRU3942

l 3GPP TS 45.005

NEBS GR63 zone4

IP65


Table 13-334 shows the surge protection specifications for the ports on an RRU3942. Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


323



NOTE



Usage Scenario


Specification

DC port


Surge

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Differential mode

10 kA

Common mode

20 kA

Differential mode

8 kA

Common mode

40 kA

Surge current

Antenna port


Surge current

CPRI port


Surge

RGPS port


Surge current


Surge current


Surge current

RET antenna port


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

250 A

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA

Differential mode

3 kA

Common mode

5 kA


324



Port

Usage Scenario


Specification



Surge

250 A


TMA Capabilites


RRU3942

Supported

Supports AISG2.0

NOTE


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


325

3900_Series_Multi-Mode_Base_Station_Tech.pdf

Recommend Documents